WO2018181898A1 - フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤及び界面活性剤の使用 - Google Patents
フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤及び界面活性剤の使用 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2018181898A1 WO2018181898A1 PCT/JP2018/013605 JP2018013605W WO2018181898A1 WO 2018181898 A1 WO2018181898 A1 WO 2018181898A1 JP 2018013605 W JP2018013605 W JP 2018013605W WO 2018181898 A1 WO2018181898 A1 WO 2018181898A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- carbon atoms
- substituent
- formula
- surfactant
- Prior art date
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K5/00—Use of organic ingredients
- C08K5/36—Sulfur-, selenium-, or tellurium-containing compounds
- C08K5/41—Compounds containing sulfur bound to oxygen
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K5/00—Use of organic ingredients
- C08K5/36—Sulfur-, selenium-, or tellurium-containing compounds
- C08K5/41—Compounds containing sulfur bound to oxygen
- C08K5/42—Sulfonic acids; Derivatives thereof
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F14/00—Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen
- C08F14/18—Monomers containing fluorine
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F14/00—Homopolymers and copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen
- C08F14/18—Monomers containing fluorine
- C08F14/26—Tetrafluoroethene
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K5/00—Use of organic ingredients
- C08K5/04—Oxygen-containing compounds
- C08K5/09—Carboxylic acids; Metal salts thereof; Anhydrides thereof
- C08K5/098—Metal salts of carboxylic acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F214/00—Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by a halogen
- C08F214/18—Monomers containing fluorine
- C08F214/26—Tetrafluoroethene
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F2800/00—Copolymer characterised by the proportions of the comonomers expressed
- C08F2800/10—Copolymer characterised by the proportions of the comonomers expressed as molar percentages
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08K—Use of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
- C08K2201/00—Specific properties of additives
- C08K2201/014—Additives containing two or more different additives of the same subgroup in C08K
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a method for producing a fluoropolymer.
- the present invention also relates to a surfactant for polymerization.
- the present invention further relates to the use of surfactants to produce fluoropolymers.
- Fluorinated anionic surfactants have been used when producing fluoropolymers by emulsion polymerization. Recently, the use of hydrocarbon surfactants instead of fluorinated anionic surfactants has been proposed.
- Patent Document 1 discloses (A) a step of charging a reactor with an amount of an aqueous solution substantially free of a surfactant, and (B) the total weight of the monomer mixture in the reactor. 25 to 75% by weight of the first monomer, based on the first monomer selected from the group consisting of vinylidene fluoride and tetrafluoroethylene, and ii) 75 to 25 based on the total weight of the monomer mixture %
- one or more additional copolymerizable monomers different from said first monomer selected from the group consisting of fluorine-containing olefins, fluorine-containing vinyl ethers, hydrocarbon olefins and mixtures thereof Charging a certain amount of the monomer mixture containing the monomers, and (C) the reaction medium at a pH of 1-7 and a pressure of 0.5-10 MPa.
- An object of this invention is to provide the novel manufacturing method of a fluoropolymer.
- the present invention is a method for producing a fluoropolymer comprising a step of obtaining a fluoropolymer by polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of a surfactant, wherein the surfactant is represented by the following formula (a ):
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- R 2a and R 3a are preferably independently a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 or more carbon atoms.
- a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom may be substituted with a monovalent organic group containing a hydroxy group or an ester bond.
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, A linear or branched alkyl group having 2 to 45 carbon atoms including -10 carbonyl groups, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 45 carbon atoms including a carbonyl group, or 1 having 3 to 45 carbon atoms An alkyl group containing a valent or divalent heterocyclic ring is preferred.
- R 1a represents the following formula: (Wherein n 11a is an integer of 0 to 10, R 11a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 12a Is an alkylene group having 0 to 3 carbon atoms, and when n 11a is an integer of 2 to 10, each of R 12a may be the same or different.
- R 2a and R 3a are preferably independently an alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms that does not contain a carbonyl group.
- R 2a and R 3a are preferably independently an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which does not contain a carbonyl group.
- X b is preferably a metal atom or NR 5b 4 (R 5b is as described above).
- the surfactant preferably has an integral value of all peak intensities observed in the chemical shift region of 2.0 to 5.0 ppm of 10% or more.
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group. When it has 3 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- the present invention is the use of a surfactant for producing a fluoropolymer by polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium, wherein the surfactant is represented by the following formula (a):
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- the present invention relates to a fluoropolymer and the following formula (a):
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group. When it has 3 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- This invention is also a composition characterized by including 500 ppb or more with respect to a fluoropolymer the compound shown by following General formula (3) including a fluoropolymer.
- Formula (3) (H— (CF 2 ) 8 —SO 3 ) q M 2 (In the formula, M 2 may have H, a metal atom, NR 5 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
- Phosphonium, R 5 is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different.
- Q is 1 or 2.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be more than 1000 ppb with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be more than 1000 ppb and 20000 ppb or less with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be 500 to 20000 ppb with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a composition containing 500 to 20000 ppb of a compound represented by the following general formula (4) with respect to a fluoropolymer.
- Formula (4) (H— (CF 2 ) 7 —COO) p M 1 (In the formula, M 1 may be H, a metal atom, NR 5 4 , an imidazolium which may have a substituent, a pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
- a good phosphonium, R 5 is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different, p is 1 or 2.
- composition of the present invention preferably has a color tone L * after firing of 50 (fluorine untreated) or less.
- composition of the present invention preferably has a color tone change rate ⁇ L * before and after the fluorination treatment of 70% or more.
- This invention is also a molded object which consists of an above-mentioned composition.
- the molded body of the present invention is preferably a stretched body.
- the production method of the present invention is a novel method for producing a fluoropolymer. Since the production method of the present invention performs polymerization in the presence of the surfactant, a fluoropolymer having a high molecular weight can be produced, and the surfactant is unlikely to remain in the resulting fluoropolymer.
- the fluororesin is a partially crystalline fluoropolymer and is fluoroplastics.
- the fluororesin has a melting point and thermoplasticity, but may be melt processable or non-melt processable.
- melt processability means that the polymer can be melted and processed using conventional processing equipment such as an extruder and an injection molding machine. Therefore, the melt processable fluororesin usually has a melt flow rate of 0.01 to 500 g / 10 min as measured by the measurement method described later.
- the fluororubber is an amorphous fluoropolymer.
- “Amorphous” means a melting peak ( ⁇ H) that appears in differential scanning calorimetry [DSC] (temperature rise temperature 10 ° C./min) or differential thermal analysis [DTA] (temperature rise rate 10 ° C./min) of a fluoropolymer. ) Is 4.5 J / g or less.
- Fluoro rubber exhibits elastomeric properties by crosslinking. By elastomeric properties is meant a property that allows the polymer to be stretched and retain its original length when the force required to stretch the polymer is no longer applied.
- the partially fluorinated rubber is a fluoropolymer containing fluoromonomer units and having a perfluoromonomer unit content of less than 90 mol% with respect to all polymerized units and having a glass transition temperature of 20 ° C. or less. And a fluoropolymer having a melting peak ( ⁇ H) size of 4.5 J / g or less.
- the perfluoro rubber is a fluoropolymer having a perfluoromonomer unit content of 90 mol% or more with respect to the total polymerization units, having a glass transition temperature of 20 ° C. or less, and 4.5 J / g. It is a fluoropolymer having the following melting peak ( ⁇ H) size, and further a polymer having a fluorine atom concentration of 71% by mass or more contained in the fluoropolymer.
- the concentration of fluorine atoms contained in the fluoropolymer is obtained by calculating the concentration (% by mass) of fluorine atoms contained in the fluoropolymer from the type and content of each monomer constituting the fluoropolymer. .
- the perfluoromonomer is a monomer that does not contain a carbon atom-hydrogen atom bond in the molecule.
- the perfluoromonomer may be a monomer in which some of the fluorine atoms bonded to the carbon atom are substituted with a chlorine atom in addition to the carbon atom and the fluorine atom. , Sulfur atom, phosphorus atom, boron atom or silicon atom.
- the perfluoromonomer is preferably a monomer in which all hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms.
- the perfluoromonomer does not include a monomer that provides a crosslinking site.
- the monomer that gives a crosslinking site is a monomer having a crosslinkable group that gives the fluoropolymer a crosslinking site for forming a crosslink with a curing agent (cure site monomer).
- the polytetrafluoroethylene [PTFE] is preferably a fluoropolymer having a tetrafluoroethylene content of 99 mol% or more based on all polymerized units.
- the fluororesin (excluding polytetrafluoroethylene) and the fluororubber are preferably fluoropolymers having a tetrafluoroethylene content of less than 99 mol% based on all polymerized units.
- the content of each monomer constituting the fluoropolymer can be calculated by appropriately combining NMR, FT-IR, elemental analysis, and fluorescent X-ray analysis depending on the type of monomer.
- the “organic group” means a group containing one or more carbon atoms or a group formed by removing one hydrogen atom from an organic compound.
- Examples of such “organic groups” An alkyl group optionally having one or more substituents, An alkenyl group optionally having one or more substituents, An alkynyl group optionally having one or more substituents, A cycloalkyl group optionally having one or more substituents, A cycloalkenyl group optionally having one or more substituents, A cycloalkadienyl group optionally having one or more substituents, An aryl group optionally having one or more substituents, An aralkyl group optionally having one or more substituents, A non-aromatic heterocyclic group optionally having one or more substituents, A heteroaryl group optionally having one or more substituents, A cyano group, Formyl group, RaO-, RaCO-, RaSO 2- , RaCOO-, RaNRaCO
- the “substituent” means a substitutable group.
- substitutable group examples include an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aromatic oxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, and an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group.
- the range represented by the endpoints includes all numerical values included in the range (eg, 1 to 10 includes 1.4, 1.9, 2.33, 5. 75, 9.98, etc.).
- At least 1 includes all numerical values greater than or equal to 1 (eg, at least 2, at least 4, at least 6, at least 8, at least 10, at least 25, at least 50, at least 100).
- the production method of the present invention is a fluoropolymer production method comprising a step of obtaining a fluoropolymer by polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of a surfactant.
- A (In the formula, R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- surfactant (1) represents at least one selected from the group consisting of the surfactant (b) represented by the formula (-) refers to the side bonded to —OSO 3 X b in the formula (hereinafter referred to as surfactant (1) ))) Is used.
- the surfactant (a) will be described.
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may include a carbonyl group (—C ( ⁇ O) —) between two carbon atoms.
- the said alkyl group can also contain the said carbonyl group at the terminal of the said alkyl group, when carbon number is 2 or more. That is, an acyl group such as an acetyl group represented by CH 3 —C ( ⁇ O) — is also included in the alkyl group.
- the alkyl group can include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring, or can form a ring.
- the heterocyclic ring is preferably an unsaturated heterocyclic ring, more preferably an oxygen-containing unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and examples thereof include a furan ring.
- a divalent heterocyclic ring may be inserted between two carbon atoms, or the divalent heterocyclic ring may be bonded to —C ( ⁇ O) — located at the terminal, A monovalent heterocyclic ring may be located at the terminal of the alkyl group.
- the “carbon number” of the alkyl group includes the number of carbon atoms constituting the carbonyl group and the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic ring.
- a group represented by CH 3 —C ( ⁇ O) —CH 2 — has 3 carbon atoms
- the group represented by — has 7 carbon atoms
- the group represented by CH 3 —C ( ⁇ O) — has 2 carbon atoms.
- a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (—OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond may be substituted. It is preferably not substituted by any functional group.
- the monovalent organic group containing an ester bond include a group represented by the formula: —O—C ( ⁇ O) —R 101a (wherein R 101a is an alkyl group).
- R 101a is an alkyl group.
- 75% or less of hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted with halogen atoms, and 25% or less are substituted with halogen atoms.
- R 2a and R 3a are each independently a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- R 2a and R 3a are preferably independently a single bond, a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 or more carbon atoms.
- the alkylene group constituting R 2a and R 3a preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom may be substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (—OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond may be substituted. It is preferably not substituted by any functional group.
- the monovalent organic group containing an ester bond include a group represented by the formula: —O—C ( ⁇ O) —R 102a (wherein R 102a is an alkyl group).
- R 102a is an alkyl group.
- 75% or less of hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted with halogen atoms, and 25% or less are substituted with halogen atoms.
- R 1a , R 2a and R 3a have a total of 6 or more carbon atoms.
- the total number of carbon atoms is preferably 8 or more, more preferably 9 or more, still more preferably 10 or more, preferably 20 or less, more preferably 18 or less, and still more preferably 15 or less. Any two of R 1a , R 2a and R 3a may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
- X a may have H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or a substituent.
- a good phosphonium, R 4a is H or an organic group.
- R 4a may be the same or different.
- R 4a is preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- the metal atom include alkali metals (Group 1), alkaline earth metals (Group 2), and Na, K, or Li is preferable.
- X a is preferably H, alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or NR 4a 4 and more preferably H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 because it is easily dissolved in water. Further since the easily soluble in water, Na, K or NH 4 are more preferred, particularly preferably Na or NH 4 is, since removal is easy, NH 4 being the most preferred.
- X a is a NH 4
- solubility in aqueous media of the surfactant is excellent, the metal component is less likely to remain in the fluoropolymer or the final product.
- R 1a includes a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, and a 1 to 10 carbonyl group.
- An alkyl group containing a ring is preferred.
- R 1a the following formula: (Wherein n 11a is an integer of 0 to 10, R 11a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms, and R 12a Is an alkylene group having 0 to 3 carbon atoms, and when n 11a is an integer of 2 to 10, R 12a may be the same or different.
- n 11a is preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 3, and still more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
- the alkyl group as R 11a preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- the alkyl group as R 11a may have a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (—OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond. However, it is preferably not substituted by any functional group.
- a functional group for example, a hydroxy group (—OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond.
- the monovalent organic group containing an ester bond include a group represented by the formula: —O—C ( ⁇ O) —R 103a (wherein R 103a is an alkyl group).
- alkyl group as R 11a 75% or less of the hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted by halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted by halogen atoms, and 25% or less are halogen atoms. Although it may be substituted by an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- R 12a is an alkylene group having 0 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the carbon number is preferably 1 to 3.
- the alkylene group as R 12a may be linear or branched.
- the alkylene group as R 12a preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- R 12a is more preferably an ethylene group (—C 2 H 4 —) or a propylene group (—C 3 H 6 —).
- the alkylene group as R 12a may have a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom substituted with a functional group, for example, a hydroxy group (—OH) or a monovalent organic group containing an ester bond. However, it is preferably not substituted by any functional group.
- Examples of the monovalent organic group containing an ester bond include a group represented by the formula: —O—C ( ⁇ O) —R 104a (wherein R 104a is an alkyl group).
- R 104a is an alkyl group.
- the alkylene group as R 12a 75% or less of the hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less is a halogen atom.
- it may be substituted by an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkylene group which does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently preferably an alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, more preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, and an ethylene group (—C 2 H 4 -) or propylene group (-C 3 H 6 -) is more preferred.
- R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. It is a group.
- the alkyl group can include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring, or can form a ring.
- the heterocyclic ring is preferably an unsaturated heterocyclic ring, more preferably an oxygen-containing unsaturated heterocyclic ring, and examples thereof include a furan ring.
- a divalent heterocyclic ring may be inserted between two carbon atoms, or the divalent heterocyclic ring may be bonded to —C ( ⁇ O) — located at the terminal, A monovalent heterocyclic ring may be located at the terminal of the alkyl group.
- the “carbon number” of the alkyl group includes the number of carbon atoms constituting the heterocyclic ring.
- alkyl group as R 1b may have include a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, A hydroxy group is preferred, and a methyl group and an ethyl group are particularly preferred.
- the alkyl group as R 1b preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- 75% or less of hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted with halogen atoms, and 25% or less are substituted with halogen atoms.
- it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
- R 1b is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. More preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, and having no substituent.
- a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms having no substituent is still more preferable, and a methyl group (—CH 3 ) or an ethyl group (—C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferred, and a methyl group (—CH 3 ) is most preferred.
- R 2b and R 4b are independently H or a substituent.
- a plurality of R 2b and R 4b may be the same or different.
- R 2b and R 4b is preferably a halogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, or a hydroxy group.
- a group and an ethyl group are particularly preferred.
- the alkyl group as R 2b and R 4b preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- 75% or less of hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted with halogen atoms, and 25% or less are substituted with halogen atoms.
- it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
- Examples of the alkyl group as R 2b and R 4b include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group. More preferably a straight-chain or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which does not contain a carbonyl group, and a straight-chain or branched alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which does not have a substituent. Is more preferable, and a methyl group (—CH 3 ) or an ethyl group (—C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferable.
- R 2b and R 4b are independently preferably H or a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which does not contain a carbonyl group, and H or 1 to 3 carbon atoms having no substituent.
- the linear or branched alkyl group is more preferable, H, a methyl group (—CH 3 ) or an ethyl group (—C 2 H 5 ) is still more preferable, and H is particularly preferable.
- R 3b is an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. When a plurality of R 3b are present, they may be the same or different.
- the alkylene group preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- 75% or less of hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms may be substituted with halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted with halogen atoms, and 25% or less are substituted with halogen atoms.
- it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the alkylene group preferably does not have any substituents.
- alkylene group examples include a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group or a cyclic alkylene group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms not containing a carbonyl group is preferable, and the number of carbons having no substituent.
- a linear or branched alkylene group of 1 to 10 is more preferable, and a methylene group (—CH 2 —), an ethylene group (—C 2 H 4 —), an isopropylene group (—CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 -) Or a propylene group (-C 3 H 6- ) is more preferable.
- R 1b , R 2b , R 3b and R 4b may be bonded to each other to form a ring, but it is preferable that no ring is formed.
- n is an integer of 1 or more.
- n is preferably an integer of 1 to 40, more preferably an integer of 1 to 30, further preferably an integer of 5 to 25, and particularly preferably an integer of 5 to 9, or 11 to 25.
- p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more.
- p is preferably an integer of 0 to 10, more preferably 0 or 1.
- q is preferably an integer of 0 to 10, more preferably an integer of 0 to 5.
- n, p and q are preferably integers of 5 or more in total.
- the total of n, p and q is more preferably an integer of 8 or more.
- the total of n, p and q is also preferably an integer of 60 or less, more preferably an integer of 50 or less, and still more preferably an integer of 40 or less.
- Xb may have H, a metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or a substituent.
- a good phosphonium, R 5b is H or an organic group.
- R 5b is preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- the metal atom include alkali metals (Group 1), alkaline earth metals (Group 2), and Na, K, or Li is preferable.
- X b may be a metal atom or NR 5b 4 (R 5b is as described above).
- Xb is preferably H, alkali metal (Group 1), alkaline earth metal (Group 2) or NR 5b 4 and more preferably H, Na, K, Li or NH 4 because it is easily dissolved in water. Further since the easily soluble in water, Na, K or NH 4 are more preferred, particularly preferably Na or NH 4 is, since removal is easy, NH 4 being the most preferred.
- Xb is NH 4
- the solubility of the surfactant in an aqueous medium is excellent, and the metal component hardly remains in the fluoropolymer or the final product.
- L represents a single bond, —CO 2 —B— *, —OCO—B— *, —CONR 6b —B— *, —NR 6b CO—B— *, or —CO—
- B has a single bond or a substituent.
- an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and R 6b is H or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
- R 6 is more preferably H or a methyl group. * Indicates the side bonded to —OSO 3 Xb in the formula.
- L is preferably a single bond.
- the surfactant (b) the following formula: (Wherein, R 1b , R 2b , L, n, and X b are as described above) are preferable.
- the surfactant preferably has an integrated value of 10% or more of all peak intensities observed in the chemical shift range of 2.0 to 5.0 ppm in the 1 H-NMR spectrum.
- the surfactant preferably has an integral value of all peak intensities observed in the chemical shift region of 2.0 to 5.0 ppm within the above range.
- the surfactant preferably has a ketone structure in the molecule.
- the integrated value is more preferably 15 or more, preferably 95 or less, more preferably 80 or less, and still more preferably 70 or less.
- the integrated value is measured at room temperature with a heavy water solvent.
- the heavy water is 4.79 ppm.
- surfactant (a) examples include the following surfactants.
- Xa is as described above.
- Surfactant (a) is a novel compound and can be produced, for example, by the production method exemplified below.
- Surfactant (a) has the formula: (Wherein R 3a is a leaving group as described above, E a is a leaving group), lithium, and the formula: R 201a 3 Si—Cl (wherein R 201a is Independently, an alkyl group or an aryl group) is reacted with a chlorosilane compound represented by the formula: (Wherein R 3a , R 201a and E a are as described above) (11a) for obtaining a compound (11a) represented by: Compound (11a) and the formula: (Wherein R 1a is a single bond or a divalent linking group as described above, and R 21a is reacted with an olefin represented by the formula: (Wherein R 1a , R 21a , R 3a and E a are as described above) (12a) to obtain the compound (12a) By removing the leaving group of compound (12a), the formula: (Wherein R 1a , R 21a and R 3a are as described above) (13a) for
- R 1a contains a furan ring
- the furan ring may be opened with an acid to be converted into a dicarbonyl derivative.
- the acid include acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, p-toluenesulfone and the like, and among them, acetic acid is preferable.
- step (11a) it is preferable that lithium and the chlorosilane compound are reacted in advance to obtain a siloxylithium compound, and then the siloxylithium compound and the compound (10a) are reacted to obtain the compound (11a).
- E a represents a leaving group.
- the leaving group include tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS) group, triethylsilyl (TES) group, triisopropylsilyl (TIPS) group, tert-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS) group, benzyl (Bn) group and the like. It is done.
- R 21a is preferably a single bond or a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms.
- chlorosilane compound examples include: Is mentioned.
- Any reaction in the step (11a) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- the ether include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like, among which tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are preferable.
- the temperature of the reaction between lithium and the chlorosilane compound in the step (11a) is preferably 10 to 40 ° C, more preferably 20 to 30 ° C.
- the reaction temperature between the siloxylithium compound and the compound (10a) in the step (11a) is preferably ⁇ 100 to 0 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 80 to ⁇ 50 ° C.
- the pressure of the reaction between lithium and the chlorosilane compound in the step (11a) is preferably 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the pressure for the reaction between the siloxylithium compound and the compound (10a) in the step (11a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time of lithium and the chlorosilane compound in the step (11a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 6 to 10 hours.
- the reaction time of the siloxylithium compound and the compound (10a) in the step (11a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 1 to 2 hours.
- the reaction ratio between the compound (11a) and the olefin is 1 to 2 with respect to 1 mol of the compound (11a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste.
- Mole is preferable, and 1 to 1.1 mol is more preferable.
- the reaction in the step (12a) can be carried out in a solvent in the presence of a thiazolium salt and a base.
- Examples of the thiazolium salt include 3-ethyl-5- (2-hydroxyethyl) -4-methylthiazolium bromide, 3-benzyl-5- (2-hydroxyethyl) -4-methylthiazolium chloride, and the like. It is done.
- Examples of the base include 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene, triethylamine and the like.
- an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and alcohol and ether are still more preferable.
- Examples of the alcohol include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, isopropanol and the like.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like, among which tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (12a) is preferably 40 to 60 ° C., more preferably 50 to 55 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (12a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (12a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 6 to 10 hours.
- the leaving reaction of the leaving group in the step (13a) can be carried out by using fluoride ion or acid.
- the method for eliminating the leaving group include a method using hydrofluoric acid, a method using an amine complex of hydrogen fluoride such as pyridine / nHF or triethylamine / nHF, cesium fluoride, potassium fluoride, lithium borofluoride.
- examples thereof include a method using an inorganic salt such as (LiBF 4 ) and ammonium fluoride and a method using an organic salt such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF).
- the leaving group elimination reaction in the step (13a) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like, among which tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (13a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C, more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (13a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (13a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 3 to 8 hours.
- the reaction ratio between the compound (13a) and the chlorosulfonic acid is 1 mol of the compound (13a) with respect to 1 mol of the compound (13a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. Is preferably 1 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.1 mol.
- the reaction in the step (14a) is preferably carried out in the presence of a base.
- a base include alkali metal hydroxides, alkaline earth metal hydroxides, amines, etc. Among them, amines are preferable.
- Examples of the amine in the step (14a) include trimethylamine, triethylamine, tributylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, dimethylbenzylamine, N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethyl-1,8-naphthalenediamine and the like.
- Heteroaromatic amines such as primary amines, pyridine, pyrrole, uracil, collidine, lutidine, 1,8-diaza-bicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene, 1,5-diaza-bicyclo [4.3.
- cyclic amines such as 0] -5-nonene.
- triethylamine and pyridine are preferable.
- the amount of the base used in the step (14a) is preferably 1 to 2 moles, preferably 1 to 1.1 moles relative to 1 mole of the compound (13a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. More preferred.
- the reaction in the step (14a) can be carried out in a polar solvent.
- a polar solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like.
- diethyl ether is preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (14a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C., more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (14a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (14a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 3 to 12 hours.
- a solution containing the compound (14a) is obtained after completion of the reaction. After adding water to the solution, the mixture may be left to separate into two phases, the aqueous phase may be recovered, and the solvent may be distilled off to recover the high purity compound (14a).
- the compound (14a) has a group represented by —OSO 3 H (that is, when X is H)
- an alkaline aqueous solution such as an aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution or aqueous ammonia is used. It is also possible to convert -OSO 3 H to sulfate groups.
- the purity of the obtained compound may be increased by distilling off the solvent, performing distillation, purification or the like.
- Surfactant (a) also has the formula: (Wherein R 3a is a monovalent organic group and E a is a leaving group, as described above, R 22a is a leaving group), and a formula: (Wherein R 1a is a monovalent organic group as described above, R 23a is a monovalent organic group), (Wherein R 1a , R 3a and E a are as described above, R 24a is a single bond or a divalent linking group) (21a) to obtain a compound (21a) By removing the leaving group of compound (21a), the formula: (Wherein R 1a , R 24a and R 3a are as described above) (22a) to obtain a compound (22a) represented by: Compound (22a) and the formula: (Wherein, X a is as described above) is reacted with a chlorosulfonic acid represented by the formula: (Wherein R 1a , R 24a , R 3a and X a are as described above), and can be produced by
- R 1a contains a furan ring
- the furan ring may be opened with an acid to be converted into a dicarbonyl derivative.
- the acid include acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, p-toluenesulfone and the like, and among them, acetic acid is preferable.
- E a represents a leaving group.
- the leaving group include tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS) group, triethylsilyl (TES) group, triisopropylsilyl (TIPS) group, tert-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS) group, benzyl (Bn) group and the like. It is done.
- R 22a is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms, and more preferably a methyl group.
- R 23a is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms, and more preferably a methyl group.
- R 24a is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms, more preferably a methylene group (—CH 2 —).
- step (21a) can be carried out in a solvent in the presence of a base.
- Examples of the base include sodium amide, sodium hydride, sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide and the like.
- an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and alcohol and ether are still more preferable.
- Examples of the alcohol include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, isopropanol and the like.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like, among which tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (21a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C, more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (21a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (21a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 3 to 8 hours.
- the leaving reaction of the leaving group in the step (22a) can be carried out by using fluoride ion or acid.
- the method for eliminating the leaving group include a method using hydrofluoric acid, a method using an amine complex of hydrogen fluoride such as pyridine / nHF or triethylamine / nHF, cesium fluoride, potassium fluoride, lithium borofluoride.
- examples thereof include a method using an inorganic salt such as (LiBF 4 ) and ammonium fluoride and a method using an organic salt such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF).
- the leaving group elimination reaction in the step (22a) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like, among which tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (22a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C., more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (22a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (22a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 3 to 8 hours.
- the reaction ratio between the compound (22a) and the chlorosulfonic acid is 1 mol of the compound (22a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. Is preferably 1 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.1 mol.
- the reaction in the step (23a) is preferably carried out in the presence of a base.
- a base include alkali metal hydroxides, alkaline earth metal hydroxides, amines, etc. Among them, amines are preferable.
- Examples of the amine in the step (23a) include trimethylamine, triethylamine, tributylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, dimethylbenzylamine, N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethyl-1,8-naphthalenediamine and the like.
- Heteroaromatic amines such as primary amines, pyridine, pyrrole, uracil, collidine, lutidine, 1,8-diaza-bicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene, 1,5-diaza-bicyclo [4.3.
- cyclic amines such as 0] -5-nonene.
- triethylamine and pyridine are preferable.
- the amount of the base used in the step (23a) is preferably 1 to 2 moles, preferably 1 to 1.1 moles relative to 1 mole of the compound (22a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. More preferred.
- the reaction in step (23a) can be carried out in a polar solvent.
- a polar solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like.
- diethyl ether is preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (23a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C., more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (23a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (23a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 3 to 12 hours.
- a solution containing the compound (23a) is obtained after completion of the reaction. After adding water to the solution, the mixture may be left to separate into two phases, the aqueous phase may be recovered, and the solvent may be distilled off to recover the high purity compound (23a).
- the compound (23a) has a group represented by —OSO 3 H (that is, when X is H)
- an alkaline aqueous solution such as an aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution or aqueous ammonia instead of water, It is also possible to convert -OSO 3 H to sulfate groups.
- the purity of the obtained compound may be increased by distilling off the solvent, performing distillation, purification or the like.
- Surfactant (a) also has the formula: Y a -R 3a -OE a (Wherein R 3a is as described above, Y a is a halogen atom, and E a is a leaving group), and a formula: (Wherein R 1a is as described above) is reacted with lithium acetylide represented by the formula: (Wherein R 1a , R 3a and E a are as described above) (31a) for obtaining a compound (31a) represented by: Compound (31a) is oxidized to give the formula (Wherein R 1a , R 3a and E a are as described above) (32a) for obtaining a compound (32a) represented by: The leaving group of compound (32a) is eliminated to give the formula: (Wherein R 1a and R 3a are as described above) (33a) for obtaining a compound (33a) represented by: Compound (33a) and the formula: (Wherein, X a is as described above) is re
- R 1a contains a furan ring
- the furan ring may be opened with an acid to be converted into a dicarbonyl derivative.
- the acid include acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, p-toluenesulfone and the like, and among them, acetic acid is preferable.
- E a represents a leaving group.
- the leaving group include tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS) group, triethylsilyl (TES) group, triisopropylsilyl (TIPS) group, tert-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS) group, benzyl (Bn) group and the like. It is done.
- the reaction ratio between the alkyl halide and the lithium acetylide is 1 for the lithium acetylide with respect to 1 mol of the alkyl halide in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. It is preferably ⁇ 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.2 mol.
- the reaction in the step (31a) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent hexane is preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (31a) is preferably ⁇ 100 to ⁇ 40 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 80 to ⁇ 50 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (31a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (31a) is preferably from 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably from 6 to 10 hours.
- the oxidation in the step (32a) is carried out by [(Cn * ) Ru III (CF 3 CO 2 ) 3 ] .H 2 O (where Cn * is 1,4,7-trimethyl-1,4,7-triazabicyclo).
- Nonane can be carried out in a nitrile solvent using a complex formed by treatment with (NH 4 ) 2 Ce (NO 3 ) 6 and trifluoroacetic acid followed by the addition of sodium perchlorate.
- the compound (32a) may be extracted by neutralizing with an alkali and using an organic solvent such as ether.
- the reaction temperature in the step (32a) is preferably 30 to 100 ° C., more preferably 40 to 90 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (32a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (32a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 3 to 8 hours.
- the leaving reaction of the leaving group in the step (33a) can be carried out by using fluoride ion or acid.
- the method for eliminating the leaving group include a method using hydrofluoric acid, a method using an amine complex of hydrogen fluoride such as pyridine / nHF or triethylamine / nHF, cesium fluoride, potassium fluoride, lithium borofluoride.
- examples thereof include a method using an inorganic salt such as (LiBF 4 ) and ammonium fluoride and a method using an organic salt such as tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF).
- the leaving group elimination reaction in the step (33a) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like, among which tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (33a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C, more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (33a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (33a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 3 to 8 hours.
- the reaction ratio between the compound (33a) and the chlorosulfonic acid is 1 mol of the compound (33a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. Is preferably 1 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.1 mol.
- the reaction in the step (34a) is preferably carried out in the presence of a base.
- a base include alkali metal hydroxides, alkaline earth metal hydroxides, amines, etc. Among them, amines are preferable.
- Examples of the amine in the step (34a) include trimethylamine, triethylamine, tributylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, dimethylbenzylamine, N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethyl-1,8-naphthalenediamine and the like.
- Heteroaromatic amines such as primary amines, pyridine, pyrrole, uracil, collidine, lutidine, 1,8-diaza-bicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene, 1,5-diaza-bicyclo [4.3.
- cyclic amines such as 0] -5-nonene.
- triethylamine and pyridine are preferable.
- the amount of the base used in the step (34a) is preferably 1 to 2 moles, preferably 1 to 1.1 moles relative to 1 mole of the compound (33a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. More preferred.
- the reaction in the step (34a) can be carried out in a polar solvent.
- a polar solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like.
- diethyl ether is preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (34a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C, more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (34a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (34a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 3 to 12 hours.
- a solution containing the compound (34a) is obtained after completion of the reaction. After adding water to the solution, the mixture may be left to separate into two phases, the aqueous phase may be recovered, and the solvent may be distilled off to recover the high purity compound (34a).
- the compound (34a) has a group represented by —OSO 3 H (that is, when X is H)
- an alkaline aqueous solution such as an aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution or aqueous ammonia instead of water, It is also possible to convert -OSO 3 H to sulfate groups.
- the purity of the obtained compound may be increased by distilling off the solvent, performing distillation, purification or the like.
- Surfactant (a) also has the formula: (Wherein R 1a is a single bond or a divalent linking group as described above, and R 21a is a single bond or a divalent linking group), and a formula: (Wherein Y 51a is an alkoxyl group) is reacted with an alkyne represented by the formula: (Wherein R 1a and R 21a are as described above.)
- Compound (41a) has the formula: (Wherein, X a is as described above) is reacted with a chlorosulfonic acid represented by the formula: (In the formula, R 1a , R 21a and X a are as described above.)
- R 1a contains a furan ring
- the furan ring may be opened with an acid to be converted into a dicarbonyl derivative.
- the acid include acetic acid, hydrochloric acid, p-toluenesulfone and the like, and among them, acetic acid is preferable.
- R 21a is preferably a single bond or a linear or branched alkylene group having 1 or more carbon atoms.
- the reaction ratio between the alkene and the alkyne is 0.5 to 2 moles of the alkene with respect to 1 mole of the alkyne in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. It is preferable that there is 0.6 to 1.2 mol.
- the reaction in the step (41a) is preferably carried out in the presence of a metal catalyst.
- a metal catalyst examples include ruthenium.
- the amount of the metal catalyst used in the step (41a) is preferably 0.01 to 0.4 mol with respect to 1 mol of the alkene in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. 0.1 mol is more preferable.
- the reaction in the step (41a) can be carried out in a polar solvent.
- a polar solvent water, acetonitrile, dimethylacetamide, and dimethylformamide are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (41a) is preferably 20 to 160 ° C., more preferably 40 to 140 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (41a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (41a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 4 to 8 hours.
- the reaction ratio between the compound (41a) and the chlorosulfonic acid is 1 mol of the compound (41a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. Is preferably 1 to 2 mol, more preferably 1 to 1.1 mol.
- the reaction in the step (42a) is preferably carried out in the presence of a base.
- a base include alkali metal hydroxides, alkaline earth metal hydroxides, amines, etc. Among them, amines are preferable.
- Examples of the amine in the step (42a) include trimethylamine, triethylamine, tributylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, dimethylbenzylamine, N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethyl-1,8-naphthalenediamine and the like.
- Heteroaromatic amines such as primary amines, pyridine, pyrrole, uracil, collidine, lutidine, 1,8-diaza-bicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene, 1,5-diaza-bicyclo [4.3.
- cyclic amines such as 0] -5-nonene.
- triethylamine and pyridine are preferable.
- the amount of the base used in the step (42a) is preferably 1 to 2 moles, preferably 1 to 1.1 moles relative to 1 mole of the compound (41a) in consideration of improvement in yield and reduction of waste. More preferred.
- the reaction in step (42a) can be carried out in a polar solvent.
- a polar solvent an organic solvent is preferable, an aprotic polar solvent is more preferable, and ether is still more preferable.
- ether examples include ethyl methyl ether, diethyl ether, monoglyme (ethylene glycol dimethyl ether), diglyme (diethylene glycol dimethyl ether), triglyme (triethylene glycol dimethyl ether), tetrahydrofuran, tetraglyme (tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether), crown ether (15-crown) -5,18-crown-6) and the like.
- diethyl ether is preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (42a) is preferably 0 to 40 ° C., more preferably 0 to 20 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (42a) is preferably from 0.1 to 5 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (42a) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and more preferably 3 to 12 hours.
- a solution containing the compound (42a) is obtained after completion of the reaction. After adding water to the solution, the mixture may be left to separate into two phases, the aqueous phase may be recovered, and the solvent may be distilled off to recover the high purity compound (42a).
- the compound (42a) has a group represented by —OSO 3 H (that is, when X is H)
- an alkaline aqueous solution such as an aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution or aqueous ammonia instead of water, It is also possible to convert -OSO 3 H to sulfate groups.
- the purity of the obtained compound may be increased by distilling off the solvent, performing distillation, purification or the like.
- surfactant (b) for example, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, CH 3 C (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 3 ) 3 CC (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 3 ) 2 CHC (O) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 2) 5 CHC (O ) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OSO 3 Na, (CH 2) 5 CHC (O ) CH 2
- Surfactant (b) is a novel compound and can be produced, for example, by the production method exemplified below.
- the surfactant (b) has the following formula: R 11b —CH ⁇ CH— (CR 2b 2 ) n — (OR 3b ) p — (CR 4b 2 ) q —L—OH (Wherein R 2b to R 4b , n, p and q are as described above.
- R 11b is H or a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and when it has 3 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring or form a ring.
- L is a single bond, —CO 2 —B— *, —OCO—B— *, —CONR 6b —B— *, —NR 6b CO—B— *, or —CO— (where —CO 2 -B-, -OCO-B-, -CONR 6b -B-, and -NR 6b CO-B- are excluded.),
- B is a carbon that may have a single bond or a substituent. number 1 from a 10 alkylene group, R 6b is, H, or may have a substituent, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms ..
- the alkyl group as R 11b preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- 75% or less of the hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted by halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted by halogen atoms, and 25% or less are halogen atoms.
- it may be substituted by an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
- R 11b is H, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a cyclic group having 3 to 9 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- An alkyl group is preferable, and H, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms that does not include a carbonyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 9 carbon atoms that does not include a carbonyl group is more preferable.
- a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms that does not have a substituent is more preferable, and H, a methyl group (—CH 3 ), or an ethyl group (—C 2 H 5 ) is even more preferable.
- H or a methyl group (—CH 3 ) is particularly preferable, and H is most preferable.
- Hydroxylation in the step (11b) can be performed by, for example, (1) a method in which phthalocyanine iron (II) (Fe (Pc)) and sodium borohydride are allowed to act on the compound (10b) in an oxygen atmosphere, or (2) a compound ( It can be carried out by a method in which an intermediate (dialkylborane) obtained is oxidized after allowing isopinocamphylborane (IpcBH 2 ) to act on 10b).
- the amount of phthalocyanine iron (II) may be a catalytic amount, and can be used in an amount of 0.001 to 1.2 mol relative to 1 mol of the compound (10b).
- sodium borohydride can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 20 mol relative to 1 mol of the compound (10b).
- the reaction of method (1) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples thereof include ethers, halogenated hydrocarbons, aromatic hydrocarbons, nitriles, and nitrogen-containing polar organic compounds.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- nitrile examples include acetonitrile, propionitrile, butyronitrile, isobutyronitrile, benzonitrile and the like, and among them, acetonitrile is preferable.
- nitrogen-containing polar organic compound examples include N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, 2-pyrrolidone, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone and the like. Of these, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in method (1) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably 0 to 150 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the method (1) is preferably from 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the reaction time in method (1) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 0.1 to 48 hours.
- isopinocampheylborane can be used in an amount of 1.0 to 10.0 mol with respect to 1 mol of the compound (10b).
- the reaction of compound (10b) and isopinocampheylborane can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples thereof include ethers, halogenated hydrocarbons, and aromatic hydrocarbons.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- reaction temperature between compound (10b) and isopinocamphylborane is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably 0 to 150 ° C.
- the pressure for the reaction between the compound (10b) and isopinocampheylborane is preferably 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the reaction time of the compound (10b) and isopinocampheylborane is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 0.1 to 48 hours.
- the oxidation in the method (2) can be carried out by allowing an oxidizing agent to act on the intermediate.
- the oxidizing agent include hydrogen peroxide.
- the oxidizing agent can be used in an amount of 0.7 to 10 mol relative to 1 mol of the intermediate.
- the oxidation in method (2) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent include water, methanol, ethanol and the like, and water is particularly preferable.
- the oxidation temperature in the method (2) is preferably 0 to 100 ° C., more preferably 0 to 80 ° C.
- the pressure for oxidation in the method (2) is preferably from 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the oxidation time in method (2) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 0.1 to 48 hours.
- examples of the method for oxidizing compound (11b) include (a) a method using Jones reagent (CrO 3 / H 2 SO 4 ) (Jones oxidation), (b) Dess-Martin periodinane ( DMP) (Dess-Martin oxidation), (c) Pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC), (d) A bleaching agent (NaOCl aqueous solution of about 5-6% in the presence of nickel compounds such as NiCl 2 ) (E) a method in which a hydrogen acceptor such as an aldehyde or a ketone is allowed to act in the presence of an aluminum catalyst such as Al (CH 3 ) 3 or Al [OCH (CH 3 ) 2 ] 3 (Oppenauer oxidation) Is mentioned.
- a hydrogen acceptor such as an aldehyde or a ketone
- the oxidation in the step (12b) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent water and an organic solvent are preferable, and water, a ketone, ether, a halogenated hydrocarbon, an aromatic hydrocarbon, a nitrile etc. are mentioned.
- ketone examples include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, diacetone alcohol, and the like. Among these, acetone is preferable.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- nitrile examples include acetonitrile, propionitrile, butyronitrile, isobutyronitrile, benzonitrile and the like, and among them, acetonitrile is preferable.
- the oxidation temperature in the step (12b) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., and can be appropriately selected depending on the method employed.
- the oxidation pressure in the step (12b) is preferably 0 to 5.0 MPa, and can be appropriately selected depending on the method employed.
- the oxidation time in the step (12b) is preferably from 0.1 to 72 hours, and can be appropriately selected depending on the method employed.
- the esterification in the step (13b) can be carried out by reacting the compound (12b) with a sulfating reagent.
- a sulfating reagent examples include sulfur trioxide pyridine complex, sulfur trioxide trimethylamine complex, sulfur trioxide amine complex such as sulfur trioxide triethylamine complex, sulfur trioxide amide complex such as sulfur trioxide dimethylformamide complex, and sulfuric acid-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. Chlorosulfuric acid, concentrated sulfuric acid, sulfamic acid and the like.
- the amount of the sulfating reagent to be used is preferably 0.5 to 10 mol, more preferably 0.5 to 5 mol, still more preferably 0.7 to 4 mol, per 1 mol of compound (12b).
- the esterification in step (13b) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples thereof include ether, halogenated hydrocarbon, aromatic hydrocarbon, pyridine, dimethyl sulfoxide, sulfolane, and nitrile.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- nitrile examples include acetonitrile, propionitrile, butyronitrile, isobutyronitrile, benzonitrile and the like, and among them, acetonitrile is preferable.
- the temperature for the esterification in step (13b) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 20 to 150 ° C.
- the pressure for sulfate esterification in the step (13b) is preferably 0 to 10 MPa, more preferably 0.1 to 5 MPa.
- the time for the esterification in step (13b) is preferably from 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably from 0.1 to 48 hours.
- Surfactant (b) also has the following formula: (Wherein L, R 1b to R 4b , n, p and q are as described above; R 101b is an organic group) are subjected to ozonolysis to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 1b to R 4b , n, p and q are as described above) (21b) to obtain the compound (21b), and Compound (21b) is sulfated to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 1b to R 4b , n, p, q and Xb are as described above).
- R 101b is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Two R 101b may be the same or different.
- the ozonolysis in the step (21b) can be carried out by allowing ozone to act on the compound (20b) and then post-treating with a reducing agent.
- Ozone can be generated by silent discharge in oxygen gas.
- Examples of the reducing agent used in the post-treatment include zinc, dimethyl sulfide, thiourea, and phosphines, and phosphines are preferable.
- the ozonolysis in the step (21b) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent water and an organic solvent are preferable, and water, alcohol, carboxylic acids, ether, a halogenated hydrocarbon, an aromatic hydrocarbon, etc. are mentioned.
- Examples of the alcohol include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, isopropanol and the like. Of these, methanol and ethanol are preferable.
- carboxylic acids examples include acetic acid and propionic acid. Of these, acetic acid is preferred.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- the temperature for ozonolysis in the step (21b) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably 0 to 150 ° C.
- the pressure for ozonolysis in the step (21b) is preferably from 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the time for ozonolysis in the step (21b) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 0.1 to 48 hours.
- the sulfate esterification in the step (22b) can be carried out by reacting the compound (21b) with a sulfating reagent, and the same conditions as the sulfate esterification in the step (13b) can be adopted.
- Surfactant (b) also has the following formula: R 21b —CH ⁇ CH— (CR 2b 2 ) n — (OR 3b ) p — (CR 4b 2 ) q —L—OH (Wherein L, R b2 to R 4b , n, p and q are as described above.
- R 21b is H or a linear or branched chain having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- Compound (32b) is oxidized to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 2b to R 4b , R 21b , R 22b , n, p and q are as described above) (33b), Compound (33b) is sulfated to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 2b to R 4b , R 21b , R 22b , n, p, q and X b are as described above), a production method comprising a step (34b) of obtaining a compound (34b) Can be manufactured.
- the alkyl group as R 21b preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- 75% or less of the hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted with a halogen atom, 50% or less may be substituted with a halogen atom, and 25% or less is halogen.
- it may be substituted by an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
- R 21b is H, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a cyclic group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- An alkyl group is preferable, and H, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms that does not include a carbonyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms that does not include a carbonyl group is more preferable.
- a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms having no substituent is more preferable, H or a methyl group (—CH 3 ) is particularly preferable, and H is most preferable.
- the alkyl group as R 22b preferably does not contain a carbonyl group.
- 75% or less of the hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atom may be substituted by halogen atoms, 50% or less may be substituted by halogen atoms, and 25% or less are halogen atoms.
- it may be substituted by an atom, it is preferably a non-halogenated alkyl group that does not contain a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the alkyl group preferably does not have any substituents.
- R 22b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 9 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. More preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms which does not contain a carbonyl group, or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 to 9 carbon atoms which does not contain a carbonyl group, and has no substituent.
- a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms is more preferred, a methyl group (—CH 3 ) or an ethyl group (—C 2 H 5 ) is particularly preferred, and a methyl group (—CH 3 ) is most preferred. preferable.
- Two R 22b may be the same or different.
- R 21b and R 22b preferably have a total carbon number of 1 to 7, more preferably 1 to 2, and most preferably 1.
- Epoxidation in the step (31b) can be carried out by allowing an epoxidizing agent to act on the compound (30b).
- the epoxidizing agent examples include perchloroacids such as metachloroperbenzoic acid (m-CPBA), perbenzoic acid, hydrogen peroxide, tert-butyl hydroperoxide, dimethyldioxirane, methyltrifluoromethyldioxirane, and the like. Of these, peracid is preferable, and metachloroperbenzoic acid is more preferable.
- the epoxidizing agent can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 10.0 mol per 1 mol of compound (30b).
- the epoxidation in the step (31b) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples include ketones, ethers, halogenated hydrocarbons, aromatic hydrocarbons, nitriles, pyridines, nitrogen-containing polar organic compounds, dimethyl sulfoxide, and the like. Among these, dichloromethane is preferable.
- ketone examples include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, diacetone alcohol, and the like. Among these, acetone is preferable.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- nitrile examples include acetonitrile, propionitrile, butyronitrile, isobutyronitrile, benzonitrile and the like, and among them, acetonitrile is preferable.
- nitrogen-containing polar organic compound examples include N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, 2-pyrrolidone, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone and the like. Of these, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone are preferable.
- the epoxidation temperature in the step (31b) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 40 to 150 ° C.
- the epoxidation pressure in the step (31b) is preferably 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the epoxidation time in the step (31b) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 0.1 to 48 hours.
- the dialkyl copper lithium can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 10.0 moles relative to 1 mole of the compound (31b).
- the reaction of step (32b) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples thereof include ethers, halogenated hydrocarbons, and aromatic hydrocarbons.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (32b) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 40 to 150 ° C.
- the reaction pressure in the step (32b) is preferably 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (32b) is preferably from 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably from 0.1 to 48 hours.
- examples of the method for oxidizing compound (32b) include (a) a method using Jones reagent (CrO 3 / H 2 SO 4 ) (Jones oxidation), (b) Dess-Martin periodinane ( DMP) (Dess-Martin oxidation), (c) Pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC), (d) A bleaching agent (NaOCl aqueous solution of about 5-6% in the presence of nickel compounds such as NiCl 2 ) (E) a method in which a hydrogen acceptor such as an aldehyde or a ketone is allowed to act in the presence of an aluminum catalyst such as Al (CH 3 ) 3 or Al [OCH (CH 3 ) 2 ] 3 (Oppenauer oxidation) Is mentioned.
- a hydrogen acceptor such as an aldehyde or a ketone
- the oxidation in the step (33b) can be carried out in a solvent.
- a solvent water and an organic solvent are preferable, and water, a ketone, alcohol, ether, a halogenated hydrocarbon, an aromatic hydrocarbon, a nitrile etc. are mentioned.
- ketone examples include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, diacetone alcohol, and the like. Among these, acetone is preferable.
- Examples of the alcohol include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, isopropanol and the like. Of these, methanol and ethanol are preferable.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- nitrile examples include acetonitrile, propionitrile, butyronitrile, isobutyronitrile, benzonitrile and the like, and among them, acetonitrile is preferable.
- the oxidation temperature in the step (33b) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., and can be appropriately selected depending on the method employed.
- the oxidation pressure in the step (33b) is preferably 0 to 5.0 MPa, and can be appropriately selected according to the method employed.
- the oxidation time in the step (33b) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, and can be appropriately selected according to the method employed.
- the sulfate esterification in the step (34b) can be carried out by reacting the compound (33b) with a sulfating reagent, and the same conditions as the sulfate esterification in the step (13b) can be adopted.
- Surfactant (b) also has the following formula: R 11b —CH ⁇ CH— (CR 2b 2 ) n — (OR 3b ) p — (CR 4b 2 ) q —L—OH (Wherein L, R 2b to R 4b , R 11b , n, p and q are as described above) are oxidized to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 2b to R 4b , R 11b , n, p and q are as defined above) (41b) to obtain the compound (41b), and Compound (41b) is sulfated to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 2b to R 4b , R 11b , n, p, q, and X b are as described above.) .
- the oxidation in the step (41b) can be carried out by allowing an oxidizing agent to act on the compound (10b) in the presence of water and a palladium compound.
- oxidizing agent examples include monovalent or divalent copper salts such as copper chloride, copper acetate, copper cyanide and trifluoromethanethiol copper, iron chloride, iron acetate, iron cyanide, trifluoromethanethiol iron, hexacyanoiron and the like.
- Benzoquinones such as iron salt, 1,4-benzoquinone, 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone, tetrachloro-1,2-benzoquinone, tetrachloro-1,4-benzoquinone, H 2 O 2 , MnO 2 , KMnO 4 , RuO 4 , m-chloroperbenzoic acid, oxygen and the like.
- copper salts, iron salts, and benzoquinones are preferable, and copper chloride, iron chloride, and 1,4-benzoquinone are more preferable.
- the oxidizing agent can be used in an amount of 0.001 to 10 mol with respect to 1 mol of compound (10b).
- the water can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 1000 mol with respect to 1 mol of the compound (10b).
- the amount of the palladium compound is palladium dichloride.
- the amount of the palladium compound may be a catalytic amount, and can be used in an amount of 0.0001 to 1.0 mol relative to 1 mol of the compound (10b).
- the oxidation in the step (41b) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent include water, esters, aliphatic hydrocarbons, aromatic hydrocarbons, alcohols, carboxylic acids, ethers, halogenated hydrocarbons, nitrogen-containing polar organic compounds, nitriles, dimethyl sulfoxide, and sulfolane.
- ester examples include ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA; also known as 1-methoxy-2-acetoxypropane), and among them, ethyl acetate is preferable.
- PGMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
- aliphatic hydrocarbon examples include hexane, cyclohexane, heptane, octane, nonane, decane, undecane, dodecane, mineral spirit, etc. Among them, cyclohexane and heptane are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- Examples of the alcohol include methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, isopropanol and the like.
- carboxylic acids examples include acetic acid and propionic acid. Of these, acetic acid is preferred.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- nitrogen-containing polar organic compound examples include N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, 2-pyrrolidone, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone and the like. Of these, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone are preferable.
- nitrile examples include acetonitrile, propionitrile, butyronitrile, isobutyronitrile, benzonitrile and the like, and among them, acetonitrile is preferable.
- the oxidation temperature in the step (41b) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 20 to 150 ° C.
- the oxidation pressure in the step (41b) is preferably 0 to 10 MPa, and more preferably 0.1 to 5.0 MPa.
- the oxidation time in the step (41b) is preferably 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably 0.1 to 48 hours.
- the sulfate esterification in the step (42b) can be carried out by reacting the compound (41b) with a sulfating reagent, and the same conditions as the sulfate esterification in the step (13b) can be adopted.
- Surfactant (b) also has the following formula: R 11b —CH ⁇ CH— (CR 2b 2 ) n —OH (Wherein R 2b , R 11b and n are as described above) are reacted with a halogenating agent to give the following formula: R 11b —CH ⁇ CH— (CR 2b 2 ) n —Z 51b (Wherein R 2b , R 11b and n are as described above.
- Z 51b is a halogen atom) (51) to obtain the compound (51)
- the compound (51) is reacted with an alkylene glycol represented by HO—R 3b —L—OH (L and R 3b are as described above), and the following formula: R 11b —CH ⁇ CH— (CR 2b 2 ) n —O—R 3b —L—OH (Wherein L, R 2b , R 3b , R 11b and n are as described above) (52) to obtain the compound (52)
- Compound (52) is oxidized to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 2b , R 3b , R 11b and n are as described above) (53) to obtain the compound (53) represented by:
- Compound (53) is sulfated to give the following formula: (Wherein L, R 2b , R 3b , R 11b , n and X b are as described above) can be produced by a production method including the step (54) of obtaining the compound (54).
- Z 51b is preferably F, Cl, Br or I, and more preferably Br.
- halogenating agent used in the step (51) examples include N-bromosuccinimide and N-chlorosuccinimide.
- the halogenating agent can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 10.0 mol with respect to 1 mol of compound (50).
- the reaction of step (51) can be carried out in the presence of phosphines such as triphenylphosphine.
- phosphines such as triphenylphosphine.
- the phosphines can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 10.0 moles with respect to 1 mole of compound (50).
- the reaction of step (51) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples thereof include ethers, halogenated hydrocarbons, and aromatic hydrocarbons.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (51) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 40 to 150 ° C.
- the pressure for the reaction in the step (51) is preferably 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (51) is preferably from 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably from 0.1 to 48 hours.
- the alkylene glycol can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 10.0 mol with respect to 1 mol of the compound (51).
- the reaction of step (52) can be carried out in the presence of a base.
- a base examples include sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and the like.
- the above base can be used in an amount of 0.5 to 10.0 mol with respect to 1 mol of compound (51).
- the reaction of step (52) can be carried out in a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples thereof include nitrogen-containing polar organic compounds, ethers, halogenated hydrocarbons, and aromatic hydrocarbons.
- nitrogen-containing polar organic compound examples include N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, 2-pyrrolidone, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone and the like. Of these, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone are preferable.
- ether examples include diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, and the like. Among them, diethyl ether and tetrahydrofuran are preferable.
- halogenated hydrocarbon examples include dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chloroform, chlorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and among them, dichloromethane and chloroform are preferable.
- aromatic hydrocarbon examples include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like, and among them, benzene and toluene are preferable.
- the reaction temperature in the step (52) is preferably ⁇ 78 to 200 ° C., more preferably ⁇ 40 to 150 ° C.
- the pressure for the reaction in the step (52) is preferably from 0 to 5.0 MPa, more preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 MPa.
- the reaction time in the step (52) is preferably from 0.1 to 72 hours, more preferably from 0.1 to 48 hours.
- the oxidation in the step (53) can be carried out by allowing an oxidizing agent to act on the compound (52) in the presence of water and a palladium compound, and the same conditions as the oxidation in the step (41) can be employed.
- the sulfate esterification in the step (54) can be carried out by reacting the compound (53) with a sulfating reagent, and the same conditions as the sulfate esterification in the step (13) can be adopted.
- the purity of the resulting compound may be increased by distilling off the solvent, performing distillation, purification, or the like after completion of each step.
- the obtained compound has a group represented by —OSO 3 H (that is, when Xb is H)
- —OSO 3 H is converted to sulfate Can be converted to
- a production method including the steps (41b) and (42b) is preferable.
- the surfactant is represented by the following formula (a):
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group. When it has 3 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- the upper limit of the concentration of the surfactant (1) in the aqueous solution is preferably 50% by mass, more preferably 30% by mass, further preferably 20% by mass, and more preferably 100000 ppm. More preferably 50,000 ppm, particularly preferably 10,000 ppm, and most preferably 5000 ppm. The lower limit is preferably 1 ppm, more preferably 10 ppm, and even more preferably 50 ppm.
- the surfactant is preferably a polymerization surfactant used for producing a fluoropolymer, or a polymerization surfactant aqueous solution used for producing a fluoropolymer.
- the method for producing a fluoropolymer of the present invention includes a step of obtaining a fluoropolymer by polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium.
- the polymerization may be emulsion polymerization.
- fluoromonomer those having at least one double bond are preferable.
- fluoromonomer include tetrafluoroethylene [TFE], hexafluoropropylene [HFP], chlorotrifluoroethylene [CTFE], vinyl fluoride, vinylidene fluoride [VDF], trifluoroethylene, fluoroalkyl vinyl ether, and fluoroalkyl ethylene.
- CH 2 CFRf 101 (wherein Rf 101 is linear or branched having 1 to 12 carbon atoms) It is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a fluoromonomer represented by (fluoroalkyl group), a fluorinated vinyl heterocycle, and a monomer that gives a crosslinking site.
- a linear or branched perfluorooxyalkyl group of Formula (140): CF 2 CFO (CF 2 CF (Y 141) O) m (CF 2) n F (Wherein Y 141 represents a fluorine atom or a trifluoromethyl group, m is an integer of 1 to 4, and n is an integer of 1 to 4), and Formula (150): CF 2 ⁇ CF—O— (CF 2 CFY 151 —O) n — (CFY 152 ) m —A 151 ( Wherein Y 151 represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a —SO 2 F group or a perfluoroalkyl group.
- the perfluoroalkyl group may contain an etheric oxygen and a —SO 2 F group.
- N represents an integer of 0 to 3.
- n Y 151 may be the same or different, Y 152 represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a —SO 2 F group, and m is .m number of Y 152 represents an integer of 1 to 5 may be different or may be the same .
- a 151 represents the -SO 2 X 151, -COZ 151 or -POZ 152 Z 153.
- X 151 represents F, Cl, Br, I, —OR 151 or —NR 152 R 153.
- Z 151 , Z 152 and Z 153 are the same or different and represent —NR 154 R 155 or —OR 156 .
- R 151 , R 152 , R 153 , R 154 , R 155 and R 156 are the same or different and each represents H, ammonium, an alkali metal, an alkyl group which may contain a fluorine atom, an aryl group, or a sulfonyl-containing group. It is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of the represented fluoromonomers.
- the “perfluoro organic group” means an organic group in which all hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms.
- the perfluoro organic group may have ether oxygen.
- Examples of the fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (110) include fluoromonomers in which Rf 111 is a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the perfluoroalkyl group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the perfluoro organic group in the general formula (110) include a perfluoromethyl group, a perfluoroethyl group, a perfluoropropyl group, a perfluorobutyl group, a perfluoropentyl group, and a perfluorohexyl group.
- the general formula (110) fluoromonomer represented by, further, in the above general formula (110), what Rf 111 is perfluoro (alkoxyalkyl) group having 4 to 9 carbon atoms, Rf 111 the following formula:
- Rf 111 is a group represented by the following formula:
- n an integer of 1 to 4.
- the fluoroalkyl vinyl ether is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of fluoromonomers represented by general formulas (110), (130) and (140).
- the fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (110) is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether), perfluoro (ethyl vinyl ether), and perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether). More preferred is at least one selected from the group consisting of fluoro (methyl vinyl ether) and perfluoro (propyl vinyl ether).
- CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O (CF 2 ) 3 F
- CF 2 CFO (CF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O) 2 (CF 2 ) 3 F
- CF 2 ⁇ CFO (CF 2 CF (CF 3 ) O) 2 (CF 2 ) 2 F are preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of F.
- CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F
- CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF (CF 3 ) OCF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F
- CF 2 CFOCF 2 CF ( CF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F) OCF 2 CF 2 SO 2 F and CF 2 ⁇ CFOCF 2 CF (SO 2 F) 2 are preferred.
- Rf 101 is fluoro alkyl group straight fluoromonomer
- Rf 101 is a perfluoroalkyl group of a straight chain is more preferable.
- Rf 101 preferably has 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- CX 181 2 CX 182 -R f 181 CHR 181 X 183
- X 181 and X 182 are independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or CH 3
- R f 181 is a fluoroalkylene group, a perfluoroalkylene group, a fluoro (poly) oxyalkylene group or a perfluoro (poly)
- R 181 is a hydrogen atom or CH 3
- X 183 is an iodine atom or a bromine atom).
- CX 191 2 CX 192 -R f 191 X 193 (Wherein X 191 and X 192 are independently a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom or CH 3 , and R f 191 is a fluoroalkylene group, a perfluoroalkylene group, a fluoropolyoxyalkylene group or a perfluoropolyoxyalkylene group, X 193 is an iodine atom or a bromine atom.)
- Z 221 is linear or branched.
- X 183 and X 193 are preferably iodine atoms.
- R f 181 and R f 191 are preferably perfluoroalkylene groups having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
- R 181 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
- X 201 is preferably a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an iodine atom, a bromine atom, or —CH 2 I.
- X 211 is preferably a cyano group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an iodine atom, a bromine atom, or —CH 2 OH.
- the general formula (230) (wherein X 231 and X 232 are independently F, Cl, a methoxy group or a fluorinated methoxy group, and Y 231 is a formula Y 232 or a formula Y 233 .
- Z 231 and Z 232 are independently F or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms).
- the fluoromonomer and the fluorine-free monomer may be polymerized.
- the fluorine-free monomer include hydrocarbon monomers that are reactive with the fluoromonomer.
- the hydrocarbon monomer include alkenes such as ethylene, propylene, butylene, and isobutylene; alkyl vinyl ethers such as ethyl vinyl ether, propyl vinyl ether, butyl vinyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether, and cyclohexyl vinyl ether; vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, n -Vinyl butyrate, vinyl isobutyrate, vinyl valerate, vinyl pivalate, vinyl caproate, vinyl caprylate, vinyl caprate, vinyl versatate, vinyl laurate, vinyl myristate, vinyl palmitate, vinyl stearate, benzoic acid Vinyl, vinyl para-t-butylbenzoate, vinyl cyclohexanecarboxylate, vinyl monochloroa
- the fluorine-free monomer may also be a functional group-containing hydrocarbon monomer.
- the functional group-containing hydrocarbon monomers include hydroxyalkyl vinyl ethers such as hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, hydroxypropyl vinyl ether, hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, hydroxyisobutyl vinyl ether, hydroxycyclohexyl vinyl ether; itaconic acid, fumaric acid, fumaric anhydride, croton Non-fluorine-containing monomers having a carboxyl group such as acid, maleic acid and maleic anhydride; Non-fluorine-containing monomers having a glycidyl group such as glycidyl vinyl ether and glycidyl allyl ether; Amino groups such as aminoalkyl vinyl ether and aminoalkyl allyl ether Non-fluorine-containing monomers; fluorine-free monomers having amide groups such as (meth) acrylamide and methylolacrylamide Etc.
- desired fluoropolymer particles can be obtained by polymerizing one or more of the fluoromonomers.
- the production method of the present invention can produce a fluoropolymer efficiently if at least one of the above surfactants is used.
- two or more of the above-mentioned surfactants may be used simultaneously as the surfactant, or may remain in a molded article made of a volatile polymer or a fluoropolymer. If present, compounds having other surface activity other than the above surfactant may be used at the same time.
- Rf 241- (X 241 ) n -Y 241 is a partially fluorinated alkyl group or a fully fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, n is 0 or 1, and X 241 is —O—, —COO— or — Y 241 is — (CH 2 ) p H, — (CH 2 ) p OH or — (OR 241 ) r OH, p is an integer of 1 to 12, Is an integer from 1 to 12, r is an integer from 0 to 12, and R 241 and R 242 are alkylene groups having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, provided that R 241 and R 242 are different from each other.
- block polymer represented by the general formula (250) include a block polymer composed of at least two types of segments selected from the group of polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene, and polyoxybutylene. .
- polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block polymers and polyoxyethylene-polyoxybutylene block polymers are exemplified, and not only AB type but also ABAA type block polymers are preferably exemplified. More preferably, by using a polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block polymer or a polyoxypropylene-polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene block polymer, a stable dispersion of a fluoropolymer at a high concentration can be prepared.
- the content of the polyoxyethylene segment is 10 to 50%, it is preferable because the generation of aggregates that may be caused by reaggregation is small, and when the content is 20 to 40%, the dispersion of the low-viscosity fluoropolymer is preferable. This is preferable because a liquid can be prepared.
- the molecular weight is not particularly limited, but may be from 1000 to 7000 g / mol, and more particularly from 2500 to 6500 g / mol, a dispersion having a low viscosity and excellent dispersibility can be prepared.
- a nucleating agent may be used.
- the preferred amount of the nucleating agent can be appropriately selected depending on the kind of the nucleating agent. For example, it is 1000 ppm or less, more preferably 500 ppm or less, and even more preferably 100 ppm or less with respect to the aqueous medium. There is a particularly preferred amount of 50 ppm or less, and a particularly preferred amount is 10 ppm or less.
- a fluoropolymer having a small primary particle size can be obtained as compared to the polymerization in the absence of the nucleating agent.
- nucleating agent examples include perfluoropolyether (PFPE) acid or a salt thereof, a hydrocarbon-containing surfactant (however, excluding surfactants (a) and (b)).
- PFPE perfluoropolyether
- hydrocarbon-containing surfactant e.g., excluding surfactants (a) and (b)
- the nucleating agent preferably does not contain an aromatic ring, and is preferably an aliphatic compound.
- the nucleating agent is preferably added before the addition of the polymerization initiator or simultaneously with the addition of the polymerization initiator, but the particle size distribution can also be adjusted by adding it during the polymerization.
- the perfluoropolyether (PFPE) acid or salt thereof may have any chain structure in which oxygen atoms in the main chain of the molecule are separated by saturated fluorocarbon groups having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. . Two or more types of fluorocarbon groups may be present in the molecule.
- a typical structure has a repeating unit represented by the following formula: (—CFCF 3 —CF 2 —O—) n (VII) (—CF 2 —CF 2 —CF 2 —O—) n (VIII) (—CF 2 —CF 2 —O—) n — (— CF 2 —O—) m (IX) (—CF 2 —CFCF 3 —O—) n — (— CF 2 —O—) m (X)
- the PFPE acid or a salt thereof may have a carboxylic acid group or a salt thereof at one end or both ends.
- the PFPE acid or a salt thereof may also have a sulfonic acid group, a phosphonic acid group or a salt thereof at one end or both ends.
- the said PFPE acid or its salt may have a different group in each terminal.
- the other end of the molecule is usually perfluorinated but may contain hydrogen or chlorine atoms.
- the PFPE acid or salt thereof has at least 2 ether oxygens, preferably at least 4 ether oxygens, and even more preferably at least 6 ether oxygens.
- at least one of the fluorocarbon groups separating the ether oxygen more preferably at least two of such fluorocarbon groups have 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
- at least 50% of the fluorocarbon groups separating the ether oxygens have 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
- the PFPE acid or salt thereof has a total of at least 15 carbon atoms, for example, a preferred minimum value of n or n + m in the repeating unit structure is at least 5.
- Two or more PFPE acids or salts thereof having an acid group at one end or both ends can be used in the production method of the present invention.
- the PFPE acid or salt thereof preferably has a number average molecular weight of less than 6000 g / mol.
- the amount of the hydrocarbon-containing surfactant added is preferably 40 ppm or less, more preferably 30 ppm or less, still more preferably 20 ppm or less with respect to the aqueous medium.
- a preferable lower limit is 0.01 ppm, more preferably 0.1 ppm, and still more preferably 1.0 ppm.
- hydrocarbon-containing surfactants are those disclosed in US Pat. No. 7,897,682 (Brothers et al.) And US Pat. No. 7,977,438 (Brothers et al.).
- Nonionic surfactants and cationic surfactants are included, including siloxane surfactants such as
- a nonionic hydrocarbon surfactant is preferable. That is, as the nucleation surfactant, a nonionic hydrocarbon surfactant is preferable.
- the nonionic hydrocarbon surfactant preferably does not contain an aromatic moiety.
- nonionic hydrocarbon surfactant examples include polyoxyethylene alkyl ether, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene alkyl ester, sorbitan alkyl ester, polyoxyethylene sorbitan alkyl ester, glycerol ester, and derivatives thereof. Can be mentioned.
- examples of polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers are polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene behenyl ether, and the like;
- Examples of ethylene alkyl phenyl ether are polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether, etc .
- examples of polyoxyethylene alkyl ester are polyethylene glycol monolaurate, polyethylene glycol monooleate Polyethylene glycol monostearate, etc .
- examples of sorbitan alkyl esters are Polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate (polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate), polyoxyethylene sorbitan monopalmitate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monostearate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, etc .
- examples of polyoxyethylene sorbitan alkyl esters are: Polyoxyethylene
- polyoxyethylene alkylamine polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl-formaldehyde condensate, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether phosphate and the like.
- Particularly preferred are polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers and polyoxyethylene alkyl esters. Examples of such ethers and esters are those having an HLB value of 10-18. More specifically, polyoxyethylene lauryl ether (EO: 5 to 20; EO represents an ethylene oxide unit), polyethylene glycol monostearate (EO: 10 to 55) and polyethylene glycol monooleate (EO: 6 to 6) 10).
- Suitable nonionic hydrocarbon surfactants include octylphenol ethoxylates such as the Triton® X series supplied by Dow Chemical Company:
- Preferred nonionic hydrocarbon surfactants include branched alcohol ethoxylates such as Tergitol® 15-S series supplied by Dow Chemical Company and Tergitol® also supplied by Dow Chemical Company. Branched secondary alcohol ethoxylates such as the TMN series:
- Ethylene oxide / propylene oxide copolymers such as Tergitol® L series surfactants supplied by Dow Chemical Company are also useful as the nonionic hydrocarbon surfactant.
- Nonionic hydrocarbon surfactants are bifunctional block copolymers supplied by BASF as Pluronic® R series, such as:
- nonionic hydrocarbon surfactants are tridecyl alcohol alkoxylates supplied by BASF Corporation as the Iconol® TDA series.
- Typical cationic surfactants can also be used as nucleation surfactants.
- Typical cationic surfactants have a positively charged hydrophilic moiety, such as an alkylated ammonium halide, such as an alkylated ammonium bromide, and a hydrophobic moiety, such as a long chain fatty acid.
- nucleating surfactants that can be used are hydrocarbon-containing siloxane surfactants, preferably hydrocarbon surfactants, where the hydrocarbyl group described above can be replaced by a halogen such as fluorine.
- these siloxane surfactants can also be regarded as hydrocarbon surfactants, i.e., the monovalent substituent on the hydrocarbyl group is hydrogen.
- nucleating surfactants are hydrocarbon siloxanes having a nonionic moiety, i.e. nonionic hydrocarbon (siloxane) surfactants.
- TFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- the PTFE aqueous emulsion can be produced in such a way that the stability of the aqueous PTFE emulsion is so high that the subsequent processability and moldability are not impaired, and a molded product having high heat resistance can be obtained.
- the reactivity ratio can be calculated by the Feynman-Loss equation from the above composition obtained by copolymerizing the comonomer with TFE in various charged compositions, determining the composition in the produced polymer immediately after initiation.
- the copolymerization was carried out using 3600 g of deionized deaerated water, 1000 ppm of perfluorooctanoic acid and 100 g of paraffin wax in a stainless autoclave having an internal volume of 6.0 L, a pressure of 0.78 MPa, and a temperature. Perform at 70 ° C. 0.05 g, 0.1 g, 0.2 g, 0.5 g, and 1.0 g of comonomer were added to the reactor, and 0.072 g of ammonium persulfate (20 ppm to water) was added to maintain the polymerization pressure of 0.78 MPa. Therefore, TFE is continuously supplied.
- the TFE charge reaches 1000 g, stirring is stopped and depressurization is performed until the reactor reaches atmospheric pressure. After cooling, the paraffin wax is separated to obtain an aqueous dispersion containing the produced polymer. The aqueous dispersion is stirred to coagulate the resulting polymer and dried at 150 ° C.
- the composition in the resulting polymer is calculated by appropriately combining NMR, FT-IR, elemental analysis, and fluorescent X-ray analysis depending on the type of monomer.
- a reactive surfactant may be used together with the surfactant.
- N271b represents an integer of 1 ⁇ 5
- Y 271 is defined as the same
- X 271 represents F or CF 3
- n271c represents an integer of 1 to 10
- Y 271 has the same definition as above
- additives can be used to stabilize each compound.
- the additive include a buffer, a pH adjuster, a stabilizing aid, and a dispersion stabilizer.
- paraffin wax paraffin wax, fluorinated oil, fluorinated solvent, silicone oil and the like are preferable. Stabilization aids may be used alone or in combination of two or more. As the stabilizing aid, paraffin wax is more preferable.
- the paraffin wax may be liquid, semi-solid or solid at room temperature, but is preferably a saturated hydrocarbon having 12 or more carbon atoms.
- the melting point of paraffin wax is usually preferably 40 to 65 ° C, more preferably 50 to 65 ° C.
- the amount of the stabilizing aid used is preferably 0.1 to 12% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 8% by mass, based on the mass of the aqueous medium used. It is desirable that the stabilizing aid is sufficiently hydrophobic and is not completely separated from the PTFE aqueous emulsion after emulsion polymerization of TFE to become a contaminant component.
- the polymerization is carried out by charging the polymerization reactor with an aqueous medium, the surfactant, the monomer, and other additives as required, stirring the contents of the reactor, and setting the reactor to a predetermined state.
- the polymerization temperature is maintained, and then a predetermined amount of a polymerization initiator is added to start the polymerization reaction.
- a monomer, a polymerization initiator, a chain transfer agent, the above surfactant and the like may be additionally added depending on the purpose.
- the surfactant may be added after the polymerization reaction has started.
- the polymerization temperature is usually 5 to 120 ° C.
- the polymerization pressure is 0.05 to 10 MPaG.
- the polymerization temperature and polymerization pressure are appropriately determined depending on the type of monomer used, the molecular weight of the target fluoropolymer, and the reaction rate.
- the above surfactant is preferably added in a total addition amount of 0.0001 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium.
- a more preferable lower limit is 0.001% by mass, and a more preferable upper limit is 1% by mass. If the amount is less than 0.0001% by mass, the dispersion force may be insufficient. If the amount exceeds 10% by mass, an effect commensurate with the amount added may not be obtained, and the polymerization rate may be decreased or the reaction may be stopped. There is.
- the amount of the compound added is appropriately determined depending on the type of monomer used, the molecular weight of the target fluoropolymer, and the like.
- the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it can generate radicals in the polymerization temperature range, and known oil-soluble and / or water-soluble polymerization initiators can be used. Furthermore, the polymerization can be started as a redox in combination with a reducing agent or the like. The concentration of the polymerization initiator is appropriately determined depending on the type of monomer, the molecular weight of the target fluoropolymer, and the reaction rate.
- an oil-soluble radical polymerization initiator or a water-soluble radical polymerization initiator can be used as the polymerization initiator.
- the oil-soluble radical polymerization initiator may be a known oil-soluble peroxide, for example, dialkyl peroxycarbonates such as diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate and disec-butylperoxydicarbonate, t-butylperoxy Peroxyesters such as isobutyrate and t-butyl peroxypivalate, dialkyl peroxides such as di-t-butyl peroxide, and di ( ⁇ -hydro-dodecafluoroheptanoyl) peroxide, di ( ⁇ -hydro-tetradecafluoroheptanoyl) peroxide, di ( ⁇ -hydro-hexadecafluorononanoyl) peroxide, di (perfluorobutyryl) peroxide, di (perfluorovaleryl) peroxide, di (Perfluorohexanoy ) Peroxide, di (perfluoroheptanoyl) peroxide, di (perfluor
- the water-soluble radical polymerization initiator may be a known water-soluble peroxide, for example, ammonium salts such as persulfuric acid, perboric acid, perchloric acid, perphosphoric acid, percarbonate, potassium salts, sodium salts. , T-butyl permaleate, t-butyl hydroperoxide and the like.
- a reducing agent such as sulfites and sulfites may also be included, and the amount used may be 0.1 to 20 times that of the peroxide.
- a redox initiator that combines an oxidizing agent and a reducing agent as the polymerization initiator.
- the oxidizing agent include persulfates, organic peroxides, potassium permanganate, manganese triacetate, cerium ammonium nitrate, bromate and the like.
- the reducing agent include sulfite, bisulfite, bromate, diimine, and oxalic acid.
- the persulfate include ammonium persulfate and potassium persulfate.
- Examples of the sulfite include sodium sulfite and ammonium sulfite.
- a copper salt or an iron salt to the combination of redox initiators.
- Examples of the copper salt include copper (II) sulfate, and examples of the iron salt include iron (II) sulfate.
- Examples of the redox initiator include potassium permanganate / oxalic acid, ammonium persulfate / bisulfite / iron (II) sulfate, ammonium persulfate / sulfite / iron (II) sulfate, ammonium persulfate / sulfite, ammonium persulfate / Iron sulfate (II), manganese triacetate / oxalic acid, cerium ammonium nitrate / oxalic acid, bromate / sulfite, bromate / bisulfite, etc., potassium permanganate / oxalic acid, ammonium persulfate / Sulfite / iron (II) sulfate is preferred.
- either an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent may be previously charged in a polymerization tank, and then the other may be added continuously or intermittently to initiate polymerization.
- an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent may be previously charged in a polymerization tank, and then the other may be added continuously or intermittently to initiate polymerization.
- potassium permanganate / oxalic acid it is preferable to add oxalic acid to the polymerization tank and continuously add potassium permanganate thereto.
- the addition amount of the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited, but an amount that does not significantly decrease the polymerization rate (for example, several ppm to water concentration) or more is collectively or sequentially or continuously in the initial stage of the polymerization. Can be added.
- the upper limit is a range where the reaction temperature may be raised while removing heat from the apparatus surface with the polymerization reaction heat, and a more preferable upper limit is a range where the polymerization reaction heat can be removed from the apparatus surface.
- the aqueous medium is a reaction medium for performing polymerization and means a liquid containing water.
- the aqueous medium is not particularly limited as long as it contains water, and water and, for example, a fluorine-free organic solvent such as alcohol, ether, and ketone, and / or a fluorine-containing organic solvent having a boiling point of 40 ° C. or lower. May be included.
- a known chain transfer agent, radical scavenger and decomposition agent may be added depending on the purpose to adjust the polymerization rate and molecular weight.
- chain transfer agent examples include esters such as dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, dimethyl succinate, isopentane, methane, ethane, propane, isobutane, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol. , Acetone, various mercaptans, various halogenated hydrocarbons such as carbon tetrachloride, and cyclohexane.
- esters such as dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, dimethyl succinate, isopentane, methane, ethane, propane, isobutane, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol.
- Acetone various mercaptans
- various halogenated hydrocarbons such as carbon tetrachloride, and cyclohexane.
- a bromine compound or iodine compound may be used as the chain transfer agent.
- Examples of the polymerization method performed using a bromine compound or an iodine compound include a method of polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of a bromine compound or an iodine compound in a substantially oxygen-free state ( Iodine transfer polymerization method).
- bromine compounds or iodine compounds to be used include, for example, the general formula: R a I x Br y (Wherein x and y are each an integer of 0 to 2 and satisfy 1 ⁇ x + y ⁇ 2, and R a is a saturated or unsaturated fluorohydrocarbon group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms or chlorofluoro A hydrocarbon group, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, which may contain an oxygen atom).
- a bromine compound or an iodine compound iodine or bromine is introduced into the polymer and functions as a crosslinking point.
- iodine compounds include 1,3-diiodoperfluoropropane, 2-iodoperfluoropropane, 1,3-diiodo-2-chloroperfluoropropane, 1,4-diiodoperfluorobutane, 1,5- Diiodo-2,4-dichloroperfluoropentane, 1,6-diiodoperfluorohexane, 1,8-diiodoperfluorooctane, 1,12-diiodoperfluorododecane, 1,16-diiodoperfluorohexadecane , diiodomethane, 1,2-diiodoethane, 1,3-diiodo -n- propane, CF 2 Br 2, BrCF 2 CF 2 Br, CF 3 CFBrCF 2 Br, CFClBr 2, BrCF 2 CFClBr, CFBrCl
- 1,4-diiodoperfluorobutane, 1,6-diiodoperfluorohexane, and 2-iodoperfluoropropane are used from the viewpoint of polymerization reactivity, cross-linking reactivity, and availability. Is preferred.
- the amount of the chain transfer agent used is usually 1 to 50,000 ppm, preferably 1 to 20,000 ppm, based on the total amount of fluoromonomer supplied.
- the chain transfer agent may be added to the reaction vessel all at once before the start of polymerization, may be added all at once after the start of polymerization, or may be added in multiple portions during the polymerization. It may also be added continuously during the polymerization.
- the method for producing the fluoropolymer comprises a step (I) of polymerizing the fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of the surfactant to produce an aqueous dispersion of fluoropolymer (A) particles, and (II) A fluoropolymer production method including a step of seed polymerizing the fluoromonomer into the fluoropolymer (A) particles in an aqueous dispersion of the fluoropolymer (A) particles.
- a monomer having the highest molar fraction of monomers in the polymer (hereinafter referred to as “most monomer”) is TFE polymer, and the most monomer is VDF.
- VDF polymer, and the CTFE polymer whose most monomer is CTFE is TFE polymer
- the TFE polymer may preferably be a TFE homopolymer, or (1) TFE, (2) one or more fluorine-containing monomers other than TFE having 2 to 8 carbon atoms. In particular, it may be a copolymer comprising VDF, HFP or CTFE, and (3) other monomers.
- (3) Other monomers include, for example, fluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, particularly 1 to 3 carbon atoms; fluorodioxole; perfluoroalkylethylene; ⁇ - And hydroperfluoroolefin.
- the TFE polymer may also be a copolymer of TFE and one or more fluorine-free monomers.
- fluorine-free monomer examples include alkenes such as ethylene and propylene; vinyl esters; vinyl ethers.
- the TFE polymer is also a copolymer of TFE, one or more fluorine-containing monomers having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and one or more fluorine-free monomers. Also good.
- the VDF polymer may preferably be a VDF homopolymer [PVDF], or (1) VDF, or (2) one or more than one VDF having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
- PVDF VDF homopolymer
- the CTFE polymer may suitably be a CTFE homopolymer, (1) CTFE, (2) one or more fluoroolefins other than CTFE having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, In particular, it may be a copolymer comprising TFE or HFP and (3) perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, particularly 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the CTFE polymer may also be a copolymer of CTFE and one or more fluorine-free monomers.
- fluorine-free monomers include alkenes such as ethylene and propylene; vinyl Esters; vinyl ethers and the like.
- the fluoropolymer produced by the production method of the present invention can be glassy, plastic or elastomeric. These are amorphous or partially crystalline and can be subjected to compression firing, melt processing or non-melt processing.
- TFE polymer tetrafluoroethylene polymer
- ethylene / TFE copolymer ethylene / TFE copolymer
- TFE TFE
- HFP HFP copolymer
- PFA perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer
- VDF perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer
- electrolyte polymer precursor is (III) fluorine As rubber, TFE / propylene copolymer, TFE / propylene / third monomer copolymer (the third monomer is VDF, HFP, CTFE, fluoroalkyl vinyl ethers, etc.), a copolymer comprising TFE and fluoroalkyl vinyl ethers.
- HFP / ethylene copolymer HFP / ethylene / TFE copolymer
- PVD Thermoplastic elastomers such as VDF / HFP copolymer, HFP / ethylene copolymer, VDF / TFE / HFP copolymer [THV]; and fluorine-containing segmented polymers described in JP-B-61-49327, etc. Can be suitably manufactured.
- the fluoropolymer is preferably a fluororesin, more preferably a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate calculated by the following formula of 50% or more, more preferably a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate exceeding 50%, and the fluorine A fluorine resin having a substitution rate of 55% or more is still more preferred, a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of 60% or more is still more preferred, a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of 75% or more is still more preferred, and the fluorine substitution rate is Is particularly preferably a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of 90 to 100%, that is, a perfluoro resin.
- Fluorine substitution rate (%) (number of fluorine atoms bonded to carbon atoms constituting fluoropolymer) / ((number of hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms constituting fluoropolymer) + (carbon atoms constituting fluoropolymer) Number of fluorine and chlorine atoms bonded to)) ⁇ 100
- the perfluororesin is preferably a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 95 to 100%, more preferably PTFE, FEP, and PFA, and particularly preferably PTFE.
- the fluoropolymer may have a core-shell structure.
- the fluoropolymer having a core-shell structure include modified PTFE including a high molecular weight PTFE core and a lower molecular weight PTFE or a modified PTFE shell in a particle.
- modified PTFE include PTFE described in JP-T-2005-527652.
- the core-shell structure can take the following structure.
- Core TFE homopolymer Shell: TFE homopolymer Core: Modified PTFE Shell: TFE homopolymer Core: Modified PTFE Shell: Modified PTFE Core: TFE homopolymer Shell: Modified PTFE Core: Low molecular weight PTFE Shell: High molecular weight PTFE Core: High molecular weight PTFE Shell: Low molecular weight PTFE
- the lower limit of the core ratio is preferably 0.5% by mass, more preferably 1.0% by mass, still more preferably 3.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 5.0% by mass. Most preferably, it is 10.0% by mass.
- the upper limit of the ratio of the core is preferably 99.5% by mass, more preferably 99.0% by mass, still more preferably 97.0% by mass, particularly preferably 95.0% by mass, and most preferably 90.0% by mass. It is.
- the lower limit of the ratio of the shell is preferably 0.5% by mass, more preferably 1.0% by mass, still more preferably 3.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 5.0% by mass. Most preferably, it is 10.0% by mass.
- the upper limit of the ratio of the shell is preferably 99.5% by mass, more preferably 99.0% by mass, still more preferably 97.0% by mass, particularly preferably 95.0% by mass, and most preferably 90.0% by mass. It is.
- the core or the shell may be composed of two or more layers.
- it may be a fluoropolymer having a three-layer structure having a core portion of modified PTFE, a core outer layer portion of a TFE homopolymer, and a shell of modified PTFE.
- the fluoropolymer having such a three-layer structure include PTFE described in International Publication No. 2006/054612.
- the polymerization of TFE is usually carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 150 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.05 to 5 MPaG.
- the polymerization is started by adding pure water to a pressure-resistant reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, deoxygenating, charging TFE, bringing the temperature to a predetermined temperature, adding a polymerization initiator, and starting the reaction. If the pressure decreases as the reaction proceeds, additional TFE is added continuously or intermittently to maintain the initial pressure. When a predetermined amount of TFE is supplied, the supply is stopped, the TFE in the reaction vessel is purged, the temperature is returned to room temperature, and the reaction is terminated. Additional TFE may be additionally supplied continuously or intermittently so that the pressure does not decrease.
- the TFE polymer In the production of the TFE polymer (PTFE), various known modified monomers can be used in combination.
- the TFE polymer is not only a TFE homopolymer but also a copolymer of TFE and a modified monomer, which is non-melt processable (hereinafter referred to as “modified PTFE”). It is a concept that also includes
- the modifying monomer examples include perhaloolefins such as HFP and CTFE; fluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, particularly 1 to 3 carbon atoms; and a ring such as fluorodioxole. Fluorinated monomers of the formula; perhaloalkylethylenes; ⁇ -hydroperhaloolefins and the like. Depending on the purpose and the supply of TFE, the supply of the modified monomer can be performed by initial batch addition or by continuous or intermittent addition.
- the content of the modified monomer in the modified PTFE is usually in the range of 0.001 to 2.0% by mass.
- the lower limit value of the modified monomer content is more preferably 0.01% by mass, and still more preferably 0.05% by mass.
- the upper limit of the modified monomer content is more preferably 1.0% by mass, still more preferably 0.5% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.3% by mass.
- the surfactant can be used in the range of use in the production method of the present invention described above.
- the concentration of the surfactant is not particularly limited as long as it is in the above range, but it is usually added at a critical micelle concentration (CMC) or less at the start of polymerization.
- CMC critical micelle concentration
- the lower limit of the amount of the surfactant used is preferably 0.0001% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass, still more preferably 0.01% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1% by mass with respect to the aqueous medium. %.
- the upper limit of the amount of the surfactant used is preferably 10% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass, still more preferably 3% by mass, and particularly preferably 2% by mass with respect to the aqueous medium.
- the surfactant may be added to the reaction vessel all at once before the start of polymerization, may be added all at once after the start of polymerization, or may be added in several portions during the polymerization. It may also be added continuously during the polymerization.
- a persulfate for example, ammonium persulfate
- an organic peroxide such as disuccinic acid peroxide or diglutaric acid peroxide
- a radical scavenger such as hydroquinone and catechol
- a peroxide decomposing agent such as ammonium sulfite can be added to adjust the radical concentration in the system.
- redox polymerization initiator it is preferable to use a redox initiator in which an oxidizing agent and a reducing agent are combined.
- the oxidizing agent include persulfates, organic peroxides, potassium permanganate, manganese triacetate, cerium ammonium nitrate, bromate and the like.
- the reducing agent include sulfite, bisulfite, bromate, diimine, and oxalic acid.
- persulfate include ammonium persulfate and potassium persulfate.
- the sulfite include sodium sulfite and ammonium sulfite.
- a copper salt or an iron salt to the combination of redox initiators.
- the copper salt include copper (II) sulfate
- the iron salt include iron (II) sulfate.
- Examples of the redox initiator include potassium permanganate / oxalic acid, ammonium persulfate / bisulfite / iron (II) sulfate, ammonium persulfate / sulfite / iron (II) sulfate, ammonium persulfate / sulfite / Ammonium sulfate / iron sulfate (II), manganese triacetate / oxalic acid, cerium ammonium nitrate / oxalic acid, bromate / sulfite, bromate / bisulfite, etc., potassium permanganate / oxalic acid, ammonium persulfate / Sulfite / iron (II) sulfate is preferred.
- either an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent may be previously charged in a polymerization tank, and then the other may be added continuously or intermittently to initiate polymerization.
- an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent may be previously charged in a polymerization tank, and then the other may be added continuously or intermittently to initiate polymerization.
- potassium permanganate / oxalic acid it is preferable to add oxalic acid to the polymerization tank and continuously add potassium permanganate thereto.
- chain transfer agents can be used.
- saturated hydrocarbons such as methane, ethane, propane, and butane
- halogenated hydrocarbons such as chloromethane, dichloromethane, and difluoroethane.
- alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, hydrogen and the like can be mentioned, but those in a gaseous state at normal temperature and pressure are preferable.
- the amount of the chain transfer agent used is usually 1 to 10,000 ppm, preferably 1 to 5000 ppm, based on the total amount of TFE supplied.
- a saturated hydrocarbon having 12 or more carbon atoms that is substantially inert to the reaction and is liquid under the reaction conditions is used as a dispersion stabilizer in the reaction system. It can also be used at 2 to 10 parts by mass with respect to parts by mass. Moreover, you may add ammonium carbonate, an ammonium phosphate, etc. as a buffering agent for adjusting pH during reaction.
- an aqueous dispersion having a solid content concentration of 1.0 to 70% by mass and an average primary particle size of 50 to 500 nm can be obtained.
- the aqueous dispersion contains the surfactant and a fluoropolymer.
- grains which consist of a TFE polymer of 0.5 micrometer or less microparticle diameter by using the said surfactant can be obtained.
- the lower limit of the solid content concentration is preferably 5% by mass, and more preferably 8% by mass. Although an upper limit is not specifically limited, 40 mass% may be sufficient and 35 mass% may be sufficient.
- the lower limit of the average primary particle diameter is preferably 100 nm, and more preferably 150 nm.
- the upper limit is preferably 400 nm, and more preferably 350 nm.
- Fine powder can be produced by coagulating the aqueous dispersion.
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer can be used for various applications as a fine powder after coagulation, washing and drying.
- the aqueous dispersion obtained by polymerization of polymer latex or the like is usually diluted with water to a polymer concentration of 5 to 20% by mass.
- the pH is adjusted to neutral or alkaline, and then the mixture is stirred more vigorously than the stirring during the reaction in a vessel equipped with a stirrer.
- the coagulation may be performed while adding a water-soluble organic compound such as methanol or acetone, an inorganic salt such as potassium nitrate or ammonium carbonate, or an inorganic acid such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid or nitric acid as a coagulant.
- a water-soluble organic compound such as methanol or acetone
- an inorganic salt such as potassium nitrate or ammonium carbonate
- an inorganic acid such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid or nitric acid
- the concentration of the unagglomerated TFE polymer in the waste water generated by the aggregation is preferably low from the viewpoint of productivity, more preferably less than 0.4% by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.3% by mass.
- pigments for coloring and various fillers for improving the mechanical properties are added, so that the pigmented or filler-mixed TFE is uniformly mixed with the pigment and the filler.
- a polymer fine powder can be obtained.
- Drying of the wet powder obtained by coagulating the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer is usually in a state where the wet powder does not flow so much, preferably in a stationary state, while maintaining a vacuum, high frequency, hot air, etc.
- Friction between powders, particularly at high temperatures generally has an unfavorable effect on fine powder type TFE polymers. This is because particles of this type of TFE polymer easily fibrillate even with a small shearing force and lose the original stable particle structure.
- the drying is performed at a drying temperature of 10 to 250 ° C., preferably 100 to 200 ° C.
- the obtained TFE polymer fine powder is preferable for molding, and suitable applications include hydraulic systems such as aircrafts and automobiles, fuel-based tubes, flexible hoses such as chemicals and steam, and wire coating applications. Can be mentioned.
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer obtained by the above polymerization is stabilized by adding a nonionic surfactant and further concentrated, and an organic or inorganic filler is added depending on the purpose. It is also preferable to use for various uses.
- the above composition has a non-adhesiveness and a low coefficient of friction when coated on a base material made of metal or ceramics, and has excellent gloss, smoothness, abrasion resistance, weather resistance and heat resistance. It is suitable for coating rolls, cooking utensils, etc., impregnating glass cloth, and the like.
- An organosol of TFE polymer can also be prepared from the aqueous dispersion.
- the organosol may contain the TFE polymer and an organic solvent, and the organic solvent includes an ether solvent, a ketone solvent, an alcohol solvent, an amide solvent, an ester solvent, an aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent, Aromatic hydrocarbon solvents and halogenated hydrocarbon solvents can be mentioned, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide and the like can be preferably used.
- the organosol can be prepared, for example, by the method described in International Publication No. 2012/002038.
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer or the TFE polymer fine powder is also preferably used as a processing aid.
- a processing aid mixing the aqueous dispersion or fine powder with a host polymer or the like improves the melt strength during the melting process of the host polymer and improves the mechanical strength, electrical properties, and difficulty of the resulting polymer. It is possible to improve flammability, prevention of dripping during combustion, and slidability.
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer or the TFE polymer fine powder is also preferably used as a battery binder or dust-proofing application.
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer or the TFE polymer fine powder is also preferably used as a processing aid after being combined with a resin other than the TFE polymer.
- the aqueous dispersion or the fine powder is, for example, a raw material of PTFE described in JP-A-11-49912, US Pat. No. 5,804,654, JP-A-11-29679, and JP-A-2003-2980. It is suitable as.
- the processing aid using the aqueous dispersion or the fine powder is not inferior to the processing aids described in the above publications.
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer is also preferably co-coagulated by mixing with an aqueous dispersion of a melt processable fluororesin and coagulating.
- the co-coagulated powder is suitable as a processing aid.
- melt-processable fluororesin examples include FEP, PFA, ETFE, and ethylene / TFE / HFP copolymer [EFEP], among which FEP is preferable.
- the aqueous dispersion preferably also contains the melt processable fluororesin.
- the melt processable fluororesin include FEP, PFA, ETFE, and EFEP.
- the aqueous dispersion containing the melt processable fluororesin can be used as a paint.
- the melt-processable fluororesin can sufficiently fuse the TFE polymer particles together, thereby improving the film-forming property and giving the resulting coating a gloss.
- the fluorine-free resin to which the co-coagulated powder is added may be a powder, a pellet, or an emulsion.
- the addition is preferably performed while applying a shearing force by a known method such as extrusion kneading or roll kneading in that each resin is sufficiently mixed.
- the aqueous TFE polymer dispersion is also preferably used as a dust control agent.
- the dust suppressing treatment agent is mixed with a dusting substance, and the mixture is subjected to a compression-shearing action at a temperature of 20 to 200 ° C., thereby fibrillating the TFE polymer to suppress dust of the dusting substance.
- it can be used in methods such as Japanese Patent No. 2827152 and Japanese Patent No. 2538783.
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer can be suitably used, for example, in the dust suppression treatment composition described in International Publication No. 2007/004250, and the dust suppression treatment method described in International Publication No. 2007/000812. Also, it can be suitably used.
- the above dust control agents are used in the fields of building materials, soil stabilizers, solidified materials, etc.Fast fertilizers such as powdered quicklime, Portland cement, anhydrous gypsum, blast furnace granulated slag powder, landfill disposal of incineration ash and harmful substances Fields, explosion-proof fields, cosmetics fields, pet litter such as cat sand, alkaline earth metal oxides, alkaline earth metal peroxides, calcium carbide, phosphite lime water, calcium aluminate, calcium silicate It is suitably used for dust suppression treatment of solid particulate materials that generate heat due to the hydration reaction represented by
- the aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer is also preferably used as a raw material for obtaining TFE polymer fibers by a dispersion spinning method (Dispersion Spinning method).
- the dispersion spinning method includes mixing an aqueous dispersion of the TFE polymer and an aqueous dispersion of a matrix polymer, and extruding the mixture to form an intermediate fiber structure.
- the intermediate fiber structure Is a method of decomposing the matrix polymer and sintering the TFE polymer particles to obtain TFE polymer fibers.
- High molecular weight PTFE can also be produced using the above-mentioned surfactant. That is, the production method of the present invention using the above-mentioned surfactant surprisingly has a molecular weight equivalent to that of the production method using the conventional fluorinated surfactant without using the conventional fluorinated surfactant. Can be produced.
- the high molecular weight PTFE powder obtained by polymerization is also useful as a raw material for a PTFE stretched product (PTFE porous material).
- a high molecular weight PTFE powder mixed with an extrusion aid can be paste-extruded, rolled as necessary, the extrusion aid removed by drying, and then stretched in at least one direction to obtain a stretched body.
- PTFE stretched body is also a porous body having a high porosity.
- the stretched body preferably has a shape of a membrane, a tube, a fiber, or a rod.
- this stretched body is a membrane (PTFE stretched membrane or PTFE porous membrane)
- it can be stretched by a known PTFE stretching method.
- a uniaxially stretched film can be obtained by roll-drawing a sheet-like or rod-like paste extrudate in the extrusion direction.
- a biaxially stretched film can be obtained by stretching in the width direction with a tenter or the like. It is also preferable to perform a semi-baking treatment before stretching.
- This PTFE stretched body is a porous body having a high porosity, It can be suitably used as a filter medium for various microfiltration filters such as air filters and chemical liquid filters, and a support material for polymer electrolyte membranes. It is also useful as a raw material for products used in the textile field, medical field, electrochemical field, sealing material field, air filtration field, ventilation / internal pressure adjustment field, liquid filtration field, general consumer material field, and the like. Below, a specific use is illustrated.
- Electrochemical field Dielectric material prepreg EMI shielding material, heat transfer material, etc. More specifically, printed circuit boards, electromagnetic shielding materials, insulating heat transfer materials, insulating materials, etc. Sealing materials gaskets, packing, pump diaphragms, pump tubes, aircraft sealing materials, etc.
- Air filtration field ULPA filter for semiconductor manufacturing
- HEPA filter for hospital and semiconductor manufacturing
- cylindrical cartridge filter for industrial use
- bag filter for industrial use
- heat resistant bag filter for exhaust gas treatment
- heat resistant pleated filter For exhaust gas treatment, SINBRAN filter (for industrial use), catalytic filter (for exhaust gas treatment), filter with adsorbent (HDD built-in), vent filter with adsorbent (for HDD built-in), vent filter (for HDD built-in, etc.), cleaning Filters for machines (for vacuum cleaners), general-purpose multilayer felt materials, cartridge filters for GT (for compatible products for GT), cooling filters (for electronic equipment housings), etc.
- Ventilation / internal pressure adjustment field Freeze-drying materials such as freeze-drying containers, automotive ventilation materials for electronic circuits and lamps, container applications such as container caps, electronic devices including small terminals such as tablet terminals and mobile phone terminals Use for protective ventilation, medical ventilation, etc.
- Liquid filtration field Semiconductor liquid filtration filter (for semiconductor production), hydrophilic PTFE filter (for semiconductor production), chemical filter (for chemical treatment), pure water production line filter (for pure water production), backwash liquid Filtration filter (for industrial wastewater treatment) etc.
- Textile field PTFE fiber fiber material
- sewing thread textile
- woven thread textile
- rope etc.
- Implants in the medical field are implants in the medical field (stretched products), artificial blood vessels, catheters, general surgery (tissue reinforcing materials), head and neck products (dura substitute), oral health (tissue regeneration medicine), orthopedics (bandages), etc.
- Low molecular weight PTFE can also be produced using the surfactant described above.
- the low molecular weight PTFE may be produced by polymerization, or the high molecular weight PTFE obtained by polymerization may be produced by reducing the molecular weight by a known method (thermal decomposition, radiation irradiation decomposition, etc.).
- Low molecular weight PTFE also called PTFE micropowder
- PTFE micropowder with a molecular weight of 600,000 or less has excellent chemical stability, extremely low surface energy, and is less prone to fibrillation, improving slipperiness and coating surface quality
- a polymerization initiator and the above surfactant are dispersed in an aqueous medium, and TFE or a monomer copolymerizable with TFE is polymerized with TFE to obtain low molecular weight PTFE. May be.
- the aqueous dispersion can be coagulated into powder particles.
- high molecular weight PTFE means PTFE having non-melt processability and fibrillation properties.
- low molecular weight PTFE means PTFE which has melt processability and does not have fibrillation properties.
- non-melt processability means the property that the melt flow rate cannot be measured at a temperature higher than the crystallization melting point in accordance with ASTM D-1238 and D-2116.
- the presence or absence of fibrillation can be determined by “paste extrusion” which is a typical method for forming “high molecular weight PTFE powder” which is a powder (fine powder) made from an emulsion polymer of TFE.
- paste extrusion is possible because high molecular weight PTFE powder has fibrillation properties.
- an unfired molded product obtained by paste extrusion does not have substantial strength or elongation, for example, when the elongation breaks when pulled at 0%, it can be considered that there is no fibrillation property.
- the high molecular weight PTFE preferably has a standard specific gravity (SSG) of 2.130 to 2.280.
- the standard specific gravity is measured by a water displacement method according to ASTM D-792 using a sample molded according to ASTM D4895-89.
- “high molecular weight” means that the standard specific gravity is within the above range.
- the low molecular weight PTFE has a melt viscosity at 380 ° C. of 1 ⁇ 10 2 to 7 ⁇ 10 5 Pa ⁇ s.
- “low molecular weight” means that the melt viscosity is in the above range.
- the high molecular weight PTFE has an extremely high melt viscosity than the low molecular weight PTFE, and it is difficult to measure the accurate melt viscosity.
- the melt viscosity of the low molecular weight PTFE can be measured, it is difficult to obtain a molded product that can be used for measuring the standard specific gravity from the low molecular weight PTFE, and it is difficult to measure the accurate standard specific gravity. It is. Therefore, in this invention, standard specific gravity is employ
- the high molecular weight PTFE preferably has a peak temperature of 333 to 347 ° C, and more preferably 335 to 345 ° C.
- the low molecular weight PTFE preferably has a peak temperature of 322 to 333 ° C., more preferably 324 to 332 ° C.
- the peak temperature is a temperature corresponding to the maximum value in the heat of fusion curve when PTFE having no history of heating to a temperature of 300 ° C. or higher is heated at a rate of 10 ° C./min using a differential scanning calorimeter [DSC]. It is.
- the high molecular weight PTFE is 333 to 347 ° C. in a heat of fusion curve when PTFE having no history of heating to a temperature of 300 ° C. or higher is heated at a rate of 10 ° C./min using a differential scanning calorimeter [DSC]. It is preferable that at least one endothermic peak appears in the above range, and the heat of fusion at 290 to 350 ° C. calculated from the heat of fusion curve is 62 mJ / mg or more.
- An unfired tape (raw tape) can also be obtained from the PTFE fine powder obtained using the surfactant described above.
- the surfactant, the decomposition product or by-product of the surfactant by-produced from the surfactant, and the residue By recovering and purifying the monomer and the like, the surfactant, a decomposition product of the surfactant by-produced from the surfactant, a by-product, a residual monomer, and the like may be reused.
- purification It can carry out by a well-known method. For example, it can be implemented by the method described in JP-T-2011-520020.
- FEP is preferably polymerized at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 150 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.3 to 6.0 MpaG.
- the FEP may further be modified by using perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) s as a third component within a range of 0.1 to 2% by mass of the total monomers.
- the surfactant in the polymerization of the FEP, can be used in the range of use in the production method of the present invention, but is usually added in an amount of 0.0001 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium.
- cyclohexane methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, methylene chloride, methyl chloride, etc.
- the buffer it is preferable to use ammonium carbonate, disodium hydrogen phosphate or the like.
- the aqueous dispersion of FEP obtained by the production method of the present invention may be subjected to post-treatment such as concentration as necessary, dried, powdered, and then melt-extruded to form pellets.
- the aqueous medium in the aqueous dispersion of FEP may contain an additive such as a nonionic surfactant as necessary, or may contain a water-soluble organic solvent such as a water-soluble alcohol. It may be one that does not contain a water-soluble organic solvent.
- melt extrusion can be performed by appropriately setting the extrusion conditions as long as the extrusion conditions are generally pelletizable.
- the obtained FEP may have an end group such as —CF 3 or —CF 2 H at at least one of the polymer main chain and the polymer side chain.
- Thermally unstable groups hereinafter referred to as “unstable end groups” such as —COOH, —CH 2 OH, —COF, —CF ⁇ CF—, —CONH 2 , —COOCH 3 are low in content, Preferably not.
- the unstable terminal group is chemically unstable, it not only lowers the heat resistance of the resin but also increases the attenuation of the obtained electric wire.
- the polymer at the end of polymerization may be produced so that the total number of unstable end groups and —CF 2 H end groups is 50 or less per 1 ⁇ 10 6 carbon atoms. preferable. More preferably, it is preferably less than 20 per 1 ⁇ 10 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 or less.
- the unstable terminal group and —CF 2 H terminal group do not exist, and all may be —CF 3 terminal groups.
- Unstable end groups and —CF 2 H end groups can be stabilized by being converted to —CF 3 end groups by fluorination treatment.
- fluorination treatment method is not particularly limited, a method of exposing the polymer to a fluorine radical source that generates fluorine radicals under the fluorination treatment conditions can be mentioned.
- the fluorine radical source include fluorine gas, CoF 3 , AgF 2 , UF 6 , OF 2 , N 2 F 2 , CF 3 OF, and halogen fluoride such as IF 5 and ClF 3 .
- a method in which the fluorinated gas and the FEP obtained by the present invention are brought into direct contact is preferable, and the above contact is preferably performed using diluted fluorine gas having a fluorine gas concentration of 10 to 50% by mass in terms of reaction control.
- the diluted fluorine gas can be obtained by diluting the fluorine gas with an inert gas such as nitrogen gas or argon gas.
- the fluorine gas treatment can be performed at a temperature of 100 to 250 ° C., for example. The processing temperature is not limited to the above range, and can be set as appropriate according to the situation.
- the fluorine gas treatment is preferably performed by supplying diluted fluorine gas continuously or intermittently into the reactor. This fluorination treatment may be a dry powder after polymerization or a melt-extruded pellet.
- the FEP obtained by the production method of the present invention has good heat resistance, chemical resistance, solvent resistance, insulation, electrical properties, etc., in addition to good moldability and resistance to molding defects.
- the FEP powder production method is a method of obtaining a powder by drying and pulverizing the FEP obtained by the production method of the present invention described above.
- the powder may be fluorinated.
- the above-mentioned method for producing a fluorinated powder is a method for obtaining a fluorinated powder by fluorinating the powder obtained by the above-described powder production method by supplying fluorine gas.
- the FEP pellet manufacturing method is a method of obtaining pellets by pelletizing the FEP obtained by the above-described manufacturing method of the present invention.
- the pellet may be fluorinated.
- the manufacturing method of said fluorinated pellet is a method of obtaining the fluorinated pellet by fluorinating by supplying a fluorine gas to the pellet obtained with the pellet manufacturing method mentioned above.
- this FEP can be used for the production of various molded products such as coating materials such as electric wires, foamed electric wires, cables and wires, tubes, films, sheets, filaments and the like.
- polymerization of TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymers such as PFA and MFA is usually carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 100 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.3 to 6.0 MpaG. It is preferable.
- the above-mentioned surfactant can be used in the range of use in the production method of the present invention. It is preferable to add in an amount of 0001 to 10% by mass.
- TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer In the polymerization of the TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer, cyclohexane, methanol, ethanol, propanol, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, methylene chloride, methyl chloride, methane, Ethane or the like is preferably used, and ammonium carbonate, disodium hydrogen phosphate or the like is preferably used as the pH buffering agent.
- aqueous dispersion of a TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer such as PFA or MFA obtained by the production method of the present invention is subjected to post-treatment such as concentration, and then dried, powdered, and then melt extruded. You may make it into a pellet.
- the aqueous medium in the aqueous dispersion may contain an additive such as a nonionic surfactant as necessary, or may contain a water-soluble organic solvent such as a water-soluble alcohol. It may be one that does not contain a water-soluble organic solvent.
- melt extrusion can be performed by appropriately setting the extrusion conditions as long as the extrusion conditions are generally pelletizable.
- the copolymer is preferably subjected to fluorine gas treatment for the purpose of improving its heat resistance and further enhancing the effect of suppressing the chemical liquid permeation of the molded product.
- the fluorine gas treatment is performed by bringing fluorine gas into contact with the chemical liquid permeation inhibitor. However, since the reaction with fluorine is very exothermic, it is preferred to dilute the fluorine with an inert gas such as nitrogen.
- the amount of fluorine in the fluorine gas / inert gas mixture is 1 to 100% by weight, preferably 10 to 25% by weight.
- the treatment temperature is 150 to 250 ° C., preferably 200 to 250 ° C., and the fluorine gas treatment time is 3 to 16 hours, preferably 4 to 12 hours.
- the gas pressure of the fluorine gas treatment is in the range of 1 to 10 atmospheres, but preferably atmospheric pressure is used. When the reactor is used at atmospheric pressure, the fluorine gas / inert gas mixture may be continuously passed through the reactor. As a result, the unstable terminal of the copolymer is converted to the --CF 3 terminal and becomes thermally stable.
- a molding method of the copolymer and the composition thereof a molding method such as compression molding, transfer molding, extrusion molding, injection molding, blow molding and the like can be applied as in the case of conventional PFA.
- a desired molded product can be obtained by such a molding method.
- the molded product include a sheet, a film, a packing, a round bar, a square bar, a pipe, a tube, a round tank, a square tank, a tank, and a wafer.
- a nonionic surfactant is appropriately added to an aqueous dispersion of a TFE / perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) copolymer such as PFA or MFA, and if necessary, polyethersulfone, polyamideimide and / or polyimide, and
- a primer composition can be obtained by dissolving or dispersing the metal powder in an organic solvent. Applying this primer composition to a metal surface, applying a melt processable fluororesin composition on the primer layer thus formed, and firing the melt processable fluororesin composition layer together with the primer layer, fluorine on the metal surface It can also be used for a resin coating method.
- the polymerization of ETFE is preferably carried out at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 100 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.3 to 2.0 MPaG.
- the ETFE may also be one in which a third monomer is further used and modified within a range of 0 to 20% by mass of the total monomers.
- TFE: ethylene: third monomer (63 to 94) :( 27 to 2) :( 1 to 10).
- Examples of the third monomer include perfluorobutylethylene, perfluorobutylethylene, 3,3,4,4,5,5,6,6,7,7,8,8,8-tridecafluorooct-1- Ene, 2,3,3,4,4,5,5-heptafluoro-1-pentene (CH 2 ⁇ CFCF 2 CF 2 CF 2 H), 2-trifluoromethyl-3,3,3-trifluoropropene ((CF 3 ) 2 C ⁇ CH 2 ) is preferred.
- the above-mentioned surfactant can be used in the range of use in the production method of the present invention, but is usually added in an amount of 0.0001 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium. .
- cyclohexane methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethane, propane, butane, pentane, hexane, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, methylene chloride, methyl chloride or the like as the chain transfer agent.
- the aqueous dispersion of ETFE obtained by the production method of the present invention may be subjected to post-treatment such as concentration, if necessary, dried, powdered, and then melt-extruded into pellets.
- the aqueous medium in the aqueous dispersion may contain an additive such as a nonionic surfactant as necessary, or may contain a water-soluble organic solvent such as a water-soluble alcohol. It may be one that does not contain a water-soluble organic solvent.
- melt extrusion can be performed by appropriately setting the extrusion conditions as long as the extrusion conditions are generally pelletizable.
- the ETFE can be extruded to form a sheet. That is, a ETFE powder or pellet can be melted, continuously extruded from a die, and cooled to obtain a sheet-like molded product. An additive may be added to ETFE.
- an additive a well-known thing can be used suitably.
- Specific examples include ultraviolet absorbers, light stabilizers, antioxidants, infrared absorbers, flame retardants, flame retardant fillers, organic pigments, inorganic pigments, dyes, and the like.
- an inorganic additive is preferred. 20 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of an ETFE sheet, and, as for content of the additive in an ETFE sheet, 10 mass% or less is especially preferable.
- membrane materials for membrane structure buildings (exercise facilities, horticultural facilities, atriums, etc.) for membrane structure buildings (exercise facilities, horticultural facilities, atriums, etc.) ).
- membrane materials for membrane structure buildings for example, outdoor use plate materials (soundproof walls, windproof fences, overtop fences, garage canopies, shopping malls, walking road walls, roofing materials), glass scattering prevention films, heat and water resistance Sheets, building materials, etc.
- Non-combustible transparent partitions road reinforcement, interiors (lighting, wall surfaces, brands, etc.), exteriors (tents, signboards, etc.), daily leisure products (fishing rods, rackets, golf clubs, projection screens, etc.), automotive materials (tops) , Damping materials, bodies, etc.), aircraft materials, marine materials, exteriors of home appliances, tanks, container inner walls, filters, construction film materials, electronic materials (printed boards, wiring boards, insulating films, release films, etc.), solar cells Mo Surface material of Yuru, mirrored material for solar power, which is useful for surface materials such solar water heaters.
- the ETFE pellets are excellent in heat resistance, and are therefore suitable as a material for a coating material such as an electric wire.
- Examples of the electric wire include a cable and a wire.
- Examples of the electric wire of the present invention include a coaxial cable, a high frequency cable, a flat cable, and a heat resistant cable.
- An electrolyte polymer precursor can also be produced using the production method of the present invention.
- the polymerization of the electrolyte polymer precursor is preferably performed at a polymerization temperature of 10 to 100 ° C. and a polymerization pressure of 0.1 to 2.0 MPaG.
- the electrolyte polymer precursor is composed of a vinyl ether monomer as shown below, and can be converted into an ion-exchangeable polymer through a hydrolysis treatment.
- Y 151 represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a —SO 2 F group or a perfluoroalkyl group.
- the perfluoroalkyl group may contain an etheric oxygen and a —SO 2 F group.
- N represents an integer of 0 to 3.
- n Y 151 may be the same or different, Y 152 represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a —SO 2 F group, and m is .m number of Y 152 represents an integer of 1 to 5 may be different or may be the same .
- a 151 represents the -SO 2 X 151, -COZ 151 or -POZ 152 Z 153.
- X 151 represents F, Cl, Br, I, —OR 151 or —NR 152 R 153.
- Z 151 , Z 152 and Z 153 are the same or different and represent —NR 154 R 155 or —OR 156 .
- R 151 , R 152 , R 153 , R 154 , R 155 and R 156 are the same or different and each represents H, ammonium, an alkali metal, an alkyl group which may contain a fluorine atom, an aryl group, or a sulfonyl-containing group. Mention may be made of the fluoromonomers represented.
- the electrolyte polymer precursor may be modified with a third monomer within a range of 0 to 20% by mass of the total monomers.
- the third monomer include polyfunctional monomers such as CTFE, vinylidene fluoride, perfluoroalkyl vinyl ether, and divinylbenzene.
- the electrolyte polymer precursor thus obtained is formed into a film shape, for example, and then subjected to hydrolysis with an alkaline solution and treatment with a mineral acid, and as a polymer electrolyte membrane, a fuel cell, an electrolysis apparatus, a redox flow battery, etc.
- an electrolyte polymer dispersion can be obtained by performing hydrolysis with an alkaline solution while maintaining the dispersion state of the electrolyte polymer precursor. Subsequently, by heating to 120 ° C. or higher in a pressurized container, for example, it can be dissolved in a water / alcohol mixed solvent to be in a solution state.
- the solution thus obtained can be used, for example, as a binder for an electrode, or cast into a film in combination with various additives, and can be used, for example, in an antifouling coating or an organic actuator.
- the polymerization temperature of the TFE / VDF copolymer is not particularly limited, and may be 0 to 100 ° C.
- the polymerization pressure is appropriately determined according to other polymerization conditions such as the polymerization temperature, but may be usually 0 to 9.8 MPaG.
- a third monomer may be further used and modified within a range of 0 to 50 mol% of the total monomers.
- TFE: ethylene: third monomer (30 to 85) :( 10 to 69.9) :( 0.1 to 10).
- the third monomer may be a fluorine-free ethylenic monomer.
- the fluorine-free ethylenic monomer is preferably selected from ethylenic monomers having 6 or less carbon atoms from the viewpoint of maintaining heat resistance and chemical resistance.
- Examples include sulfonic acid, acrylic acid, and methacrylic acid.
- the above-mentioned surfactant can be used in the range of use in the production method of the present invention, but usually 0.0001 to 5% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium. Add by volume.
- the TFE / VDF copolymer obtained by polymerization may be amidated by contacting with ammonia water, ammonia gas or a nitrogen compound capable of generating ammonia.
- the TFE / VDF copolymer obtained by the above-described method is also preferably used as a raw material for obtaining a TFE / VDF copolymer fiber by a spinning drawing method.
- the above-mentioned spinning and drawing method is a method in which a TFE / VDF copolymer is melt-spun and then cooled and solidified to obtain an undrawn yarn, and then the undrawn yarn is run into a heated tubular body and drawn to draw TFE. / VDF copolymer fiber is obtained.
- the TFE / VDF copolymer can be dissolved in an organic solvent to obtain a solution of the TFE / VDF copolymer.
- organic solvent include nitrogen-containing organic solvents such as N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and dimethylformamide; ketone solvents such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, and methyl isobutyl ketone; And ester solvents such as butyl acetate; ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran and dioxane; and low-boiling general-purpose organic solvents such as mixed solvents thereof.
- the solution can be used as a battery binder.
- the TFE / VDF copolymer aqueous dispersion as a composite porous membrane by coating a porous substrate made of a polyolefin resin. It is also preferable to disperse inorganic particles and / or organic particles in an aqueous dispersion, coat the porous substrate, and use it as a composite porous membrane.
- the composite porous membrane thus obtained can be used as a separator for a lithium secondary battery.
- the melt-processable fluororesin powder can be suitably used as a powder coating.
- a powder coating material composed of the above-described melt processable fluororesin powder is applied to a substrate, a film having a smooth surface can be obtained.
- the melt processable fluororesin powder having an average particle size of 1 ⁇ m or more and less than 100 ⁇ m is particularly suitable as a powder coating used for electrostatic coating, and the melt processable fluororesin powder having an average particle size of 100 ⁇ m or more and 1000 ⁇ m or less is In particular, it is suitable as a powder coating used for rotational coating or rotational molding.
- the melt processable fluororesin powder can be produced by a method of obtaining a powder by drying and pulverizing the melt processable fluororesin obtained by the production method of the present invention described above.
- a production method for producing the melt-processable fluororesin powder is also one aspect of the present invention.
- the polymerization of the fluororubber is carried out by charging pure water and the surfactant in a pressure-resistant reaction vessel equipped with a stirrer, deoxygenating, charging the monomer, and bringing it to a predetermined temperature. Then, a polymerization initiator is added to start the reaction. Since the pressure decreases as the reaction proceeds, additional monomer is added continuously or intermittently to maintain the initial pressure. When a predetermined amount of monomer is supplied, the supply is stopped, the monomer in the reaction vessel is purged, the temperature is returned to room temperature, and the reaction is terminated. In this case, the polymer latex can be continuously removed from the reaction vessel.
- thermoplastic elastomer when a thermoplastic elastomer is produced as the fluororubber, as disclosed in International Publication No. 00/01741, the fluoropolymer fine particles are once synthesized at a high concentration and then diluted to perform further polymerization.
- a method capable of increasing the final polymerization rate as compared with normal polymerization.
- the polymerization temperature is usually ⁇ 20 to 200 ° C., preferably 5 to 150 ° C.
- the polymerization pressure is usually 0. It is carried out at 5 to 10 MPaG, preferably 1 to 7 MPaG.
- the pH in the polymerization medium is preferably maintained at 2.5 to 13 by a known method or the like using a pH adjuster described later.
- Examples of the monomer used for the polymerization of the fluororubber include, in addition to vinylidene fluoride, fluorine-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomers that have at least the same number of fluorine atoms as carbon atoms and can be copolymerized with vinylidene fluoride.
- Examples of the fluorine-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer include trifluoropropene, pentafluoropropene, hexafluorobutene, and octafluorobutene. Among these, hexafluoropropene is particularly suitable due to the elastomeric properties obtained when it blocks polymer crystal growth.
- fluorine-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer examples include trifluoroethylene, TFE, and CTFE.
- a fluorine-containing monomer having one or two or more chlorine and / or bromine substituents may be used. it can.
- Perfluoro (alkyl vinyl ether) such as perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether) can also be used.
- TFE and HFP are preferred for producing fluororubber.
- This composition of fluororubber exhibits good elastomeric properties, chemical resistance, and thermal stability.
- the surfactant described above can be used in the range of use in the production method of the present invention, but is usually added in an amount of 0.0001 to 20% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous medium. To do. Preferably it is 10 mass% or less, More preferably, it is 2 mass% or less.
- a known inorganic radical polymerization initiator can be used as the polymerization initiator.
- the inorganic radical polymerization initiator include conventionally known water-soluble inorganic peroxides such as sodium, potassium and ammonium persulfates, perphosphates, perborates, percarbonates and permanganates. Useful.
- the radical polymerization initiator further includes a reducing agent such as sodium, potassium or ammonium sulfite, bisulfite, metabisulfite, hyposulfite, thiosulfate, phosphite or hypophosphite.
- a metal compound that is easily oxidized such as a ferrous salt, a cuprous salt, or a silver salt.
- a suitable inorganic radical polymerization initiator is ammonium persulfate, and it is more preferred to use it in a redox system with ammonium persulfate and sodium bisulfite.
- the concentration of the polymerization initiator added is appropriately determined depending on the molecular weight of the target fluoropolymer and the polymerization reaction rate, but is 0.0001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the total amount of monomers. Set to 5% by weight.
- chain transfer agents can be used, but hydrocarbons, esters, ethers, alcohols, ketones, chlorine compounds, carbonates, etc. can be used. , Hydrocarbons, esters, ethers, alcohols, chlorine compounds, iodine compounds, and the like can be used.
- acetone and isopropyl alcohol are preferable, and in the polymerization of thermoplastic elastomers, isopentane, diethyl malonate and ethyl acetate are preferable from the viewpoint that reaction rate is difficult to decrease, and I (CF 2 ) 4 I, I (CF 2 ) Diiodine compounds such as 6 I and ICH 2 I are preferred from the viewpoint that iodination at the polymer ends is possible and they can be used as reactive polymers.
- the amount of the chain transfer agent used is usually 0.5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 to 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 mol%, preferably 1.0 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 to 3.5 ⁇ 10, based on the total amount of monomers supplied. It is preferably ⁇ 3 mol%.
- paraffin wax or the like can be preferably used as the emulsion stabilizer, and in the polymerization of the thermoplastic elastomer, phosphate, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide or the like is preferably used as the pH adjuster. it can.
- the fluororubber obtained by the production method of the present invention has a solid content concentration of 1.0 to 40% by mass and an average particle size of 0.03 to 1 ⁇ m, preferably 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m when polymerization is completed.
- the number average molecular weight is 1,000 to 2,000,000.
- the fluororubber obtained by the production method of the present invention can be made into a dispersion suitable for rubber molding by adding or concentrating a dispersion stabilizer such as a hydrocarbon-based surfactant, if necessary. it can.
- the dispersion is processed by adjusting pH, coagulation, heating, and the like. Each process is performed as follows.
- the coagulation is performed by adding an alkaline earth metal salt.
- alkaline earth metal salts include nitrates, chlorates and acetates of calcium or magnesium.
- Either the pH adjustment or the coagulation may be performed first, but the pH adjustment is preferably performed first.
- washing is performed with the same volume of water as the fluororubber to remove a small amount of impurities such as buffer solution and salt existing in the fluororubber, and drying is performed. Drying is usually carried out in a drying oven at a temperature of about 70 to 200 ° C. while circulating air at a high temperature.
- the fluoro rubber may be partially fluorinated rubber or perfluoro rubber.
- Partially fluorinated rubbers include vinylidene fluoride (VdF) fluorine rubber, tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) / propylene (Pr) fluorine rubber, tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) / propylene / vinylidene fluoride (VdF) fluorine rubber.
- the vinylidene fluoride-based fluororubber is preferably a copolymer composed of 45 to 85 mol% of vinylidene fluoride and 55 to 15 mol% of at least one other monomer copolymerizable with vinylidene fluoride. . More preferably, the copolymer is composed of 50 to 80 mol% of vinylidene fluoride and 50 to 20 mol% of at least one other monomer copolymerizable with vinylidene fluoride.
- fluoroalkyl vinyl ether a fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (110) is preferable.
- vinylidene fluoride-based fluorororubber examples include VdF / HFP rubber, VdF / HFP / TFE rubber, VdF / CTFE rubber, VdF / CTFE / TFE rubber, VDF / general formula (100).
- the tetrafluoroethylene / propylene-based fluororubber is preferably a copolymer composed of 45 to 70 mol% of tetrafluoroethylene, 55 to 30 mol% of propylene, and 0 to 5 mol% of a fluoromonomer providing a crosslinking site. .
- the fluoro rubber may be perfluoro rubber.
- the perfluoro rubber include perfluoro rubbers containing TFE, such as TFE / general formula (110), (130) or (140) fluoromonomer copolymer and TFE / general formula (110), (130 ) Or (140) is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a fluoromonomer / monomer copolymer that provides a crosslinking site.
- the composition is preferably 45 to 90/10 to 55 (mol%), more preferably 55 to 80/20 to 45, and still more preferably 55 to 70/30 to 45.
- a monomer copolymer that provides a TFE / PMVE / cross-linking site it is preferably 45 to 89.9 / 10 to 54.9 / 0.01 to 4 (mol%), and more preferably 55 to 77. It is 9/20 to 49.9 / 0.1 to 3.5, and more preferably 55 to 69.8 / 30 to 44.8 / 0.2 to 3.
- fluoromonomer copolymer represented by the general formula (110), (130), or (140) having 4 to 12 carbon atoms preferably 50 to 90/10 to 50 (mol%). More preferably, it is 60 to 88/12 to 40, and still more preferably 65 to 85/15 to 35.
- TFE / monomer copolymer which gives a fluoromonomer / crosslinking site represented by the general formula (110), (130) or (140) having 4 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 50 to 89.9 / 10 To 49.9 / 0.01 to 4 (mol%), more preferably 60 to 87.9 / 12 to 39.9 / 0.1 to 3.5, and still more preferably 65 to 84. 8/15 to 34.8 / 0.2 to 3.
- composition When the composition is out of the range, the properties as a rubber elastic body are lost, and the properties tend to be similar to those of a resin.
- perfluoro rubber examples include TFE / fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (140) / fluoromonomer copolymer that gives a crosslinking site, TFE / perfluorovinyl ether copolymer represented by the general formula (140), and TFE. / At least one selected from the group consisting of a fluoromonomer copolymer represented by the general formula (110) and a TFE / fluoromonomer represented by the general formula (110) / a monomer copolymer giving a crosslinking site It is preferable that
- perfluoro rubber examples include perfluoro rubbers described in International Publication No. 97/24381, Japanese Patent Publication No. 61-57324, Japanese Patent Publication No. 4-81608, Japanese Patent Publication No. 5-13961, and the like. Can do.
- the fluororubber preferably has a glass transition temperature of ⁇ 70 ° C. or higher, more preferably ⁇ 60 ° C. or higher, and even more preferably ⁇ 50 ° C. or higher from the viewpoint of excellent compression set at high temperatures. . Further, from the viewpoint of good cold resistance, it is preferably 5 ° C. or lower, more preferably 0 ° C. or lower, and further preferably ⁇ 3 ° C. or lower.
- the glass transition temperature is obtained by using a differential scanning calorimeter (Mettler Toledo, DSC822e) to obtain a DSC curve by raising the temperature of 10 mg of the sample at 10 ° C./min. It can be determined as the temperature indicating the midpoint of the two intersections of the extension of the line and the tangent at the inflection point of the DSC curve.
- the fluororubber preferably has a Mooney viscosity ML (1 + 20) at 170 ° C. of 30 or more, more preferably 40 or more, and still more preferably 50 or more, from the viewpoint of good heat resistance. Further, in terms of good workability, it is preferably 150 or less, more preferably 120 or less, and even more preferably 110 or less.
- the fluororubber preferably has a Mooney viscosity ML (1 + 20) at 140 ° C. of 30 or more, more preferably 40 or more, and still more preferably 50 or more from the viewpoint of good heat resistance. Moreover, it is preferable that it is 180 or less at a point with favorable workability, It is more preferable that it is 150 or less, It is still more preferable that it is 110 or less.
- the fluororubber preferably has a Mooney viscosity ML (1 + 10) at 100 ° C. of 10 or more, more preferably 20 or more, and still more preferably 30 or more from the viewpoint of good heat resistance. Further, in terms of good workability, it is preferably 120 or less, more preferably 100 or less, and still more preferably 80 or less.
- the Mooney viscosity can be measured according to JIS K6300 at 170 ° C. or 140 ° C. and 100 ° C. using a Mooney viscometer MV2000E type manufactured by ALPHA TECHNOLOGIES.
- the fluorororubber obtained by the production method of the present invention may be in any form as long as it is obtained from the above polymerization, and may be an aqueous dispersion after polymerization, or an aqueous dispersion after polymerization. From the above, it can also be used as a gum or crumb obtained by coagulation, drying or the like by a conventionally known method.
- the emulsifier used in the production method of the present invention can improve the stability of the emulsion, and as described above, an initiator such as an organic peroxide, a chain transfer agent such as an iodine or bromine compound during the polymerization, etc. It is more preferably used in a polymerization method in which a hardly water-soluble substance is added.
- the gum is a small granular lump made of fluororubber, and the crumb is a result of the fluororubber not being able to maintain a small granular shape as a gum at room temperature, It is in the form of an irregular lump.
- the fluororubber can be processed into a fluororubber composition by adding a curing agent, a filler and the like.
- curing agent examples include polyols, polyamines, organic peroxides, organic tins, bis (aminophenol) tetraamines, and bis (thioaminophenol).
- the said fluororubber composition consists of the above-mentioned fluororubber, it is excellent in the point which does not contain an emulsifier substantially and is easy to bridge
- a fluororubber molded product can be obtained by molding using the fluororubber.
- the molding method is not particularly limited, and a known method performed using the above-described curing agent can be used.
- the fluororubber molded product is suitable for seals, gaskets, electric wire coatings, hoses, tubes, laminates, accessories, and the like, and is particularly suitable for parts for semiconductor manufacturing equipment, automobile parts, and the like.
- an aqueous dispersion containing the fluoropolymer is usually obtained.
- the fluoropolymer is usually in a concentration of 8 to 50% by mass of the aqueous dispersion obtained by carrying out the polymerization.
- the preferable lower limit of the concentration of the fluoropolymer is 10% by mass, the more preferable lower limit is 15% by mass, the preferable upper limit is 40% by mass, and the more preferable upper limit is 35% by mass.
- the aqueous dispersion obtained by carrying out the above polymerization may be concentrated or dispersion-stabilized to form a dispersion, or may be recovered by drying by subjecting it to coagulation or agglomeration, and other solids (for example, it may be a pellet).
- the surfactant is unlikely to remain in the powder or pellets.
- the surfactant can also be suitably used as a dispersant for dispersing the fluoropolymer obtained by polymerization in an aqueous medium.
- an aqueous dispersion containing particles composed of the fluoropolymer, the surfactant, and the aqueous medium is usually obtained.
- the aqueous dispersion is one in which particles made of a fluoropolymer are dispersed in an aqueous medium in the presence of the surfactant.
- the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 9.5 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the aqueous dispersion. If it is less than 0.0001 part by weight, the dispersion stability may be inferior. If it exceeds 9.5 part by weight, there is no dispersion effect commensurate with the abundance and it is not practical.
- a more preferred lower limit of the surfactant is 0.001 part by weight, and a more preferred upper limit is 2 parts by weight.
- the aqueous dispersion is an aqueous dispersion obtained by performing the above-described polymerization, a dispersion obtained by concentrating, stabilizing or extracting the aqueous dispersion, and a powder comprising a fluoropolymer. May be dispersed in an aqueous medium in the presence of the surfactant.
- the aqueous dispersion obtained by the polymerization may contain an anion exchange resin or an anion exchange resin and a cation exchange resin in the presence of a nonionic surfactant.
- the purified aqueous dispersion is subjected to a step of contacting with the mixed bed and a step of concentrating the aqueous dispersion obtained in the above step so that the solid concentration is 30 to 70% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the aqueous dispersion.
- the nonionic surfactant is not particularly limited, but those described below can be used.
- the said anion exchange resin is not specifically limited, A well-known thing can be used. Moreover, a well-known method can be used for the method made to contact with the said anion exchange resin.
- anion exchange resin examples include a strongly basic anion exchange resin having —N + X ⁇ (CH 3 ) 3 groups (X represents Cl or OH) as a functional group, —N + X ⁇ (CH 3) 3 (C 2 H 4 OH) group (X is the same. as above) strongly basic anion exchange resins having such it includes those known.
- the above-mentioned “mixed bed composed of cation exchange resin and anion exchange resin” is not particularly limited, and when both are packed in the same column, when both are packed in different columns, both are This includes the case where it is dispersed in a crude fluoropolymer aqueous dispersion.
- a known method is employed as the concentration method, and examples thereof include phase separation, electric concentration, and ultrafiltration.
- the concentration the fluoropolymer concentration can be concentrated to 30 to 70% by mass depending on the application. Concentration may impair dispersion stability. In that case, a dispersion stabilizer may be further added. As said dispersion stabilizer, you may add the said surfactant and other various surfactants.
- nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyalkyl ethers, particularly polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers (for example, Triton X-100 (trade name) manufactured by Rohm & Haas), Polyoxyethylene isotridecyl ether (for example, Neugen TDS80C (trade name) manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd., Leocor TD90D (trade name) manufactured by Lion, Genapol X080 (trade name) manufactured by Clariant), polyoxyethylene ether
- nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyalkyl ethers, particularly polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers (for example, Triton X-100 (trade name) manufactured by Rohm & Haas), Polyoxyethylene isotridecyl ether (for example, Neugen TDS80C (trade name) manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd., Leocor TD90D (trade name) manufactured by
- the total amount of the dispersion stabilizer is 0.5 to 20% by mass with respect to the solid content of the dispersion. If it is less than 0.5% by mass, the dispersion stability may be inferior. If it exceeds 20% by mass, there is no dispersion effect commensurate with the abundance and this is not practical.
- a more preferable lower limit of the dispersion stabilizer is 2% by mass, and a more preferable upper limit is 12% by mass.
- the aqueous dispersion obtained by carrying out the polymerization can also be prepared as an aqueous dispersion having a long pot life by subjecting it to a dispersion stabilization treatment without concentrating depending on the application.
- examples of the dispersion stabilizer used include the same as those described above.
- aqueous dispersion is not particularly limited, and is applied as it is as an aqueous dispersion, and is applied by coating on a substrate and drying, followed by firing as necessary; non-woven fabric, resin molded product, etc. Impregnation comprising impregnating and drying a porous support, preferably firing; coating on a substrate such as glass and drying; dipping in water if necessary; peeling the substrate to form a thin film Examples thereof include water-dispersed paints, electrode binders, electrode water repellents, and the like.
- the aqueous dispersion is a known pigment, thickener, viscosity modifier, leveling agent, dispersion stabilizer (stabilizer) for improving mechanical stability or storage stability, pH adjuster such as aqueous ammonia. Coating by blending compounding agents such as antifoaming agent, antiseptic, antibacterial agent, filler, antifreezing agent, film forming aid, film forming agent, organic solvent, etc., or in combination with other polymer compounds It can be used as a water-based paint.
- compounding agents such as antifoaming agent, antiseptic, antibacterial agent, filler, antifreezing agent, film forming aid, film forming agent, organic solvent, etc.
- An anionic surfactant can be preferably included for the purpose of adjusting the viscosity of the aqueous dispersion or for improving the miscibility of pigments, fillers and the like.
- the anionic surfactant can be appropriately added within a range where there is no problem in terms of economy and environment.
- anionic surfactant examples include non-fluorinated anionic surfactants and fluorinated anionic surfactants, but non-fluorinated anionic surfactants that do not contain fluorine, that is, hydrocarbon anionic surfactants. Is preferred.
- the type is not particularly limited as long as it is a known anionic surfactant.
- the anionic surfactant described in International Publication Nos. 2013/146950 and 2013/146947 An agent can be used. Examples thereof include those having a saturated or unsaturated aliphatic chain having 6 to 40 carbon atoms, preferably 8 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 9 to 13 carbon atoms.
- the saturated or unsaturated aliphatic chain may be linear or branched, and may have a cyclic structure.
- the hydrocarbon may be aromatic or may have an aromatic group.
- the hydrocarbon may have a heteroatom such as oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur.
- anionic surfactant examples include alkyl sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, alkylaryl sulfates and salts thereof; aliphatic (carboxylic) acids and salts thereof; alkyl phosphate esters, alkylaryl phosphate esters or salts thereof; Of these, alkyl sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, aliphatic carboxylic acids or salts thereof are preferred.
- alkyl sulfate or a salt thereof ammonium lauryl sulfate or sodium lauryl sulfate is preferable.
- succinic acid, decanoic acid, undecanoic acid, undecenoic acid, lauric acid, hydrododecanoic acid, or a salt thereof is preferable.
- the addition amount of the anionic surfactant is preferably 10 ppm to 5000 ppm with respect to the solid content mass of the fluoropolymer, although it depends on the kind of the anionic surfactant and other compounding agents.
- As a minimum of the addition amount of an anionic surfactant 50 ppm or more is more preferable, and 100 ppm or more is still more preferable. If the amount added is too small, the viscosity adjustment effect is poor.
- As an upper limit of the addition amount of an anionic surfactant 3000 ppm or less is more preferable, and 2000 ppm or less is still more preferable. If the amount added is too large, the mechanical stability and storage stability of the aqueous dispersion may be impaired.
- methyl cellulose, alumina sol, polyvinyl alcohol, carboxylated vinyl polymer and the like can be blended in addition to the anionic surfactant.
- the aqueous dispersion may contain other polymer compounds as long as the characteristics of the aqueous dispersion are not impaired.
- the other polymer compound is not particularly limited.
- polyethylene oxide (dispersion stabilizer), polyethylene glycol (dispersion stabilizer), phenol resin, urea resin, epoxy resin, melamine resin, polyester resin, polyether resin, An acrylic silicone resin, a silicone resin, a silicone polyester resin, a polyurethane resin, etc. are mentioned.
- the surfactant, the decomposition product or by-product of the surfactant by-produced from the surfactant, and the residue By recovering and purifying the monomer and the like, the surfactant, a decomposition product of the surfactant by-produced from the surfactant, a by-product, a residual monomer, and the like may be reused.
- purification It can carry out by a well-known method. For example, it can be implemented by the method described in JP-T-2011-520020.
- the method for recovering and purifying the monomer and the like is not particularly limited, but a conventionally known method can be adopted, for example, US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/15937, US Patent Application Publication No. The method of 2007/25902 specification and US Patent application publication 2007/27251 specification are mentioned, Specifically, the following method is mentioned.
- the decomposition product or by-product of the surfactant by-produced from the surfactant, residual monomers, etc., ion exchange resin, activated carbon, silica gel, clay, zeolite in the waste water For example, a method of separating the waste water and the adsorbed particles after adsorbing the adsorbent particles such as the above-described surfactant to adsorb the surfactant and the like. If the adsorbed particles adsorbing the surfactant or the like are incinerated, release of the surfactant or the like into the environment can be prevented.
- the surfactant and the like can be desorbed and eluted from the ion exchange resin particles adsorbed with the surfactant and the like by a known method.
- the ion exchange resin particles are anion exchange resin particles
- the surfactant or the like can be eluted by bringing the mineral acid into contact with the anion exchange resin.
- a water-soluble organic solvent is added to the obtained eluate, it usually separates into two phases. Therefore, the surfactant and the like can be recovered by recovering and neutralizing the lower phase containing the surfactant and the like.
- the water-soluble organic solvent include polar solvents such as alcohol, ketone and ether.
- Examples of another method for recovering the surfactant and the like from the ion exchange resin particles include a method using an ammonium salt and a water-soluble organic solvent, and a method using an alcohol and, if desired, an acid. In the latter method, ester derivatives such as the above-mentioned surfactants are produced, and therefore can be easily separated from the alcohol by distillation.
- fluoropolymer particles and other solids are contained in the waste water, it is preferable to remove these before bringing the waste water into contact with the adsorbed particles.
- a method for removing fluoropolymer particles and other solid components include a method in which an aluminum salt or the like is added to precipitate these, and then a drainage and a precipitate are separated, and an electrocoagulation method.
- the concentration of the non-aggregated fluoropolymer in the waste water is preferably low from the viewpoint of productivity, more preferably less than 0.4% by mass, and particularly preferably less than 0.3% by mass.
- a scrubber solution containing a surfactant and the like is brought into contact with an organic solvent such as deionized water, an alkaline aqueous solution and a glycol ether solvent using a scrubber.
- an organic solvent such as deionized water, an alkaline aqueous solution and a glycol ether solvent using a scrubber.
- the method of obtaining is mentioned.
- the scrubber solution can be recovered in a state where the surfactant and the like are phase-separated, so that the surfactant and the like can be easily recovered and reused.
- the alkali compound include alkali metal hydroxides and quaternary ammonium salts.
- the scrubber solution containing the surfactant and the like may be concentrated using a reverse osmosis membrane or the like.
- the concentrated scrubber solution usually contains fluorine ions.
- further addition of alumina to remove the fluorine ions can facilitate the reuse of the surfactant and the like.
- the surfactant or the like may be collected by contacting the adsorbent particles with the scrubber solution to adsorb the surfactant or the like.
- the surfactant recovered by any of the above methods can be reused for the production of the fluoropolymer.
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group. When it has 3 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- the said surfactant for polymerization can be used suitably as said surfactant used with the manufacturing method of this invention.
- the suitable structure of the said surfactant for polymerization is the same as that of the said surfactant used with the manufacturing method of this invention.
- the present invention is also the use of a surfactant for producing a fluoropolymer by polymerizing a fluoromonomer in an aqueous medium, wherein the surfactant is represented by the following formula (a):
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- the aqueous medium, the fluoromonomer, and the fluoropolymer are preferably the same as those that can be used in the production method of the present invention.
- the suitable structure of the said surfactant is the same as that of the said surfactant used with the manufacturing method of this invention.
- the present invention also provides a fluoropolymer and the following formula (a):
- R 1a is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom has a hydroxy group or an ester bond. It may be substituted with a monovalent organic group, and when it has 2 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a carbonyl group. When it has 3 or more carbon atoms, it may contain a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic ring.
- R 2a and R 3a are independently a single bond or a divalent linking group .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a are 6 or more carbon atoms in total .
- X a Is H, a metal atom, NR 4a 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 4a is H or an organic group, the same or different .
- R 1a, R 2a and R 3a is that attached to any 2 Tsugaotagai, may form a ring surfactant represented by) (a), and the following formula (b): (In the formula, R 1b is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent or a cyclic alkyl group having 3 or more carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- R 2b and R 4b may be the case of three or more carbon atoms to form a ring include a monovalent or divalent heterocyclic are independently H or a substituent .
- R 3b is , An optionally substituted alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, n is an integer of 1 or more, p and q are each independently an integer of 0 or more, and X b is H , Metal atom, NR 5b 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent or phosphonium which may have a substituent, and R 5b is H or organic a group may be the same or different .
- R 1b, R 2b, R 3b and R 4b have Re or bind to 2 Tsugaotagai may .L other to form a ring is a single bond, -CO 2 -B - *, - OCO-B - *, - CONR 6b -B
- the composition of the present invention comprises a composition comprising a fluoropolymer and the surfactant (a), a composition comprising the fluoropolymer and the surfactant (b), or a fluoropolymer, the surfactant (a) and It is a composition containing the said surfactant (b).
- the fluoropolymer is preferably the same as that which can be used in the production method of the present invention, more preferably a fluororesin, and more preferably a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 50% or more as described above.
- a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of more than 50% is still more preferred, a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of 55% or more is still more preferred, a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of 60% or more is still more preferred, and the fluorine substitution
- a fluororesin having a rate of 75% or more is even more preferable, a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 80% or more is particularly preferable, and a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 90 to 100%, that is, a perfluororesin is most preferable.
- the perfluororesin is preferably a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 95 to 100%, more preferably PTFE, FEP, and PFA, and particularly preferably PTFE.
- the suitable structure of the said surfactant is the same as that of the said surfactant used with the manufacturing method of this invention.
- the composition of the present invention may be an aqueous dispersion, a powder, or a pellet.
- the aqueous dispersion may be a dispersion after polymerization or a processed dispersion after polymerization.
- a nonionic surfactant or the like may be added for mechanical stability or storage stability.
- the addition amount is preferably 0.5 to 25% by mass with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- a more preferable lower limit is 1% by mass, an even more preferable lower limit is 3% by mass, a more preferable upper limit is 20% by mass, a still more preferable upper limit is 15% by mass, and an even more preferable upper limit is 10% by mass. is there.
- the aqueous dispersion is a dispersion system using an aqueous medium as a dispersion medium and the fluoropolymer as a dispersoid.
- the aqueous medium is not particularly limited as long as it is a liquid containing water, and may contain, for example, an organic solvent such as alcohol, ether, ketone, and paraffin wax in addition to water.
- the lower limit of the content of the surfactant in the composition is preferably 1 ppb, more preferably 10 ppb, still more preferably 100 ppb, and more preferably 1 ppm relative to the fluoropolymer. More preferred is 10 ppm, most preferred is 50 ppm, and most preferred is 50 ppm.
- the upper limit is preferably 100,000 ppm, more preferably 50,000 ppm, still more preferably 10,000 ppm, and still more preferably 5000 ppm with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- a composition containing a fluoropolymer and containing 50 ppb or more of a compound represented by the following general formula (3) is also one aspect of the present invention.
- Phosphonium, R 5 is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different.
- Q is 1 or 2.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be 100 ppb or more, or 500 ppb or more.
- the present invention includes a fluoropolymer, It is also a composition characterized by containing 500 ppb or more of the compound represented by the following general formula (3) with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- Formula (3) (H— (CF 2 ) 8 —SO 3 ) q M 2 (In the formula, M 2 may have H, a metal atom, NR 5 4 , imidazolium which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
- Phosphonium, R 5 is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different.
- Q is 1 or 2.
- the fluoropolymer is preferably the same as that which can be used in the production method of the present invention, more preferably a fluororesin, and more preferably a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 50% or more as described above.
- a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of more than 50% is still more preferred, a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of 55% or more is still more preferred, a fluorine resin having a fluorine substitution rate of 60% or more is still more preferred, and the fluorine substitution
- a fluororesin having a rate of 75% or more is even more preferable, a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 80% or more is particularly preferable, and a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 90 to 100%, that is, a perfluororesin is most preferable.
- the perfluororesin is preferably a fluororesin having a fluorine substitution rate of 95 to 100%, more preferably PTFE, FEP, and PFA, and particularly preferably PTFE.
- the composition of the present invention contains 500 ppb or more of the compound represented by the general formula (3).
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be 500 to 20000 ppb with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- the upper limit of the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be 10,000 ppb.
- the lower limit of the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be more than 1000 ppb, 1100 ppb, 2000 ppb, or 3000 ppb.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) may be more than 1000 ppb and 20000 ppb or less with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- One embodiment of the present invention may be a composition that is an aqueous dispersion or a composition that is a powder.
- the aqueous dispersion may be a dispersion after polymerization or a processed dispersion after polymerization.
- a nonionic surfactant or the like may be added for mechanical stability or storage stability.
- the aqueous dispersion is a dispersion system using an aqueous medium as a dispersion medium and the fluoropolymer as a dispersoid.
- the aqueous medium is not particularly limited as long as it is a liquid containing water, and may contain, for example, an organic solvent such as alcohol, ether, ketone, and paraffin wax in addition to water.
- the resulting aqueous dispersion may contain a compound represented by the following general formula (4).
- One embodiment of the present invention is a composition containing these compounds in the following range.
- One embodiment of the present invention is a composition containing 100 ppb or more of a compound represented by the following general formula (4) with respect to a fluoropolymer.
- the upper limit of the content of the compound represented by the general formula (4) is not particularly limited, but may be 1,000,000 ppb, 100,000 ppb, 20,000 ppb, 10,000 ppb, or 5000 ppb. There may be.
- the lower limit of the content of the compound represented by the general formula (4) may be 500 ppb or 1000 ppb.
- M 1 may be H, a metal atom, NR 5 4 , an imidazolium which may have a substituent, a pyridinium which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
- a good phosphonium, R 5 is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different, p is 1 or 2.
- R 5 is preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably H or an organic group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- One embodiment of the present invention may be a composition that is a powder.
- the powder preferably has an average particle size of 0.5 to 2000 ⁇ m.
- the more preferable lower limit of the average particle diameter is 1 ⁇ m
- the more preferable upper limit is 1000 ⁇ m
- the still more preferable upper limit is 800 ⁇ m.
- the average particle size is low molecular weight PTFE
- a laser diffraction particle size distribution measuring device manufactured by Nippon Laser Corporation
- the cascade is not used, the pressure is 0.1 MPa, and the particle size is measured for 3 seconds.
- the particle diameter corresponds to 50% of the cumulative particle size distribution obtained by measuring the distribution.
- the average particle diameter is a value measured according to JIS K6891.
- the powder preferably has a color tone L * after firing of 50 or less.
- the color tone L * is more preferably 45 or less, still more preferably 40 or less, particularly preferably 35 or less, and still more preferably 30 or less.
- a sample for measuring the color tone L * is obtained by molding 4.0 g of PTFE powder into a disk-shaped PTFE molded body having an inner diameter of 28.6 mm and a thickness of about 4 mm.
- the color tone L * of the powder is measured using a colorimetric color difference meter (CIELAB color scale) in accordance with JIS Z8781-4.
- the firing is performed by heat treatment for 10 minutes in an electric furnace heated to 385 ° C.
- the composition of the present invention preferably has a color tone change rate ⁇ L * before and after the fluorination treatment of 70% or more.
- the color tone change rate ⁇ L * is more preferably 80 or more, and still more preferably 90 or more.
- fluorine / nitrogen (volume ratio) 20/80
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (3) or (4) is a value measured by liquid chromatography mass spectrometry as described in Examples described later.
- the fluoropolymer is preferably obtained by polymerization using a hydrocarbon surfactant.
- the composition of the present invention may contain a hydrocarbon-based surfactant.
- the hydrocarbon surfactant include the surfactants (a) and (b) described above.
- conventionally known additives such as pigments and fillers can be added to the composition. What is necessary is just to use the said additive in the range which does not prevent the effect of this invention.
- the present invention is also a molded article made of the above composition.
- the said molded object is an extending
- the stretched body include, but are not limited to, a thread, a tube, a tape, and a film (uniaxially stretched film, biaxially stretched film).
- the molded object of this invention can be manufactured by shape
- the average primary particle size solid content is diluted to about 0.02% by mass, based on a calibration curve of the transmittance of 550 nm projection light per unit length and the average primary particle size determined by electron micrographs. Indirectly from the transmittance.
- the transmittance was measured using a dynamic light scattering measuring device Microtrack 9340UPA (Honeywell).
- volume average particle diameter is measured by a dynamic light scattering method.
- An aqueous fluoropolymer dispersion adjusted to a fluoropolymer solid content concentration of 1.0% by mass was prepared and measured at 25 ° C. and a total of 70 times using ELSZ-1000S (Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.).
- the refractive index of the solvent (water) was 1.3328, and the viscosity of the solvent (water) was 0.8878 mPa ⁇ s.
- the aqueous dispersion of the number average particle size fluoropolymer was diluted with water until the solid content concentration became 0.15% by mass, the transmittance of 550 nm projection light with respect to the unit length of the obtained diluted latex, and the transmission electron microscope
- a calibration curve is created by measuring the number-basis length average particle diameter determined by measuring the unidirectional diameter from a photograph. Using this calibration curve, the number average particle diameter was determined from the measured transmittance of projection light of 550 nm of each sample.
- Melt flow rate In accordance with ASTM D3307-01, using a melt indexer (manufactured by Toyo Seiki Co., Ltd.), the mass (g / 10 Min) was defined as MFR.
- the temperature corresponding to the endothermic peak appearing in the heat of fusion curve was taken as the peak temperature of the PTFE resin.
- the temperature corresponding to the maximum value is the first melting point of the PTFE resin.
- Standard specific gravity Using a sample molded in accordance with ASTM D4895-89, measurement was performed by a water displacement method in accordance with ASTM D-792.
- a viscosity B type rotational viscometer (manufactured by Tokyo Keiki Co., Ltd.) was used, and the viscosity at 25 ° C. or 35 ° C. was measured according to JIS K 6893.
- Formula (1) (H— (CF 2 ) m —COO) p M 1 (wherein m is 3 to 19, M 1 is H, a metal atom, NR 5 4 , and has a substituent.
- R 5 is H or an organic group, which may be the same or different, and may be imidazolium, which may have a substituent, pyridinium which may have a substituent, or phosphonium which may have a substituent.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) contained in the extract was determined by converting to perfluorooctanoic acid.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) having carbon number (m + 1) in the extract was calculated using the formula (3).
- a and b in the formula (3) were obtained from the formula (1).
- XCm ((ACm ⁇ b) / a) ⁇ ((50 ⁇ m + 45) / 413) (3)
- XCm content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) having a carbon number (m + 1) in the extraction solution (ng / mL)
- ACm Peak area of the compound represented by the general formula (1) of carbon number (m + 1) in the extraction solution The quantification limit in this measurement is 1 ng / mL.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (1) having the carbon number (m + 1) contained in the powder is represented by the formula (4 ).
- YCm XCm ⁇ 12.6 (4)
- YCm content of compound represented by general formula (1) having carbon number (m + 1) contained in the powder (vs. fluoropolymer)
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (2) having 4 or more and 20 or less carbon atoms contained in the extract solution is represented by the general formula (2) having 4 or more and 20 or less carbon atoms using a liquid chromatograph mass spectrometer. Were measured. About the extracted liquid phase, the peak area of the compound shown by General formula (2) of each carbon number was calculated
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (2) having n carbon atoms in the extract was calculated using the formula (3).
- a and b in the formula (3) were obtained from the formula (1).
- XSn ((ASn ⁇ b) / a) ⁇ ((50 ⁇ n + 81) / 499) (3)
- XSn content of compound represented by general formula (2) having n carbon atoms in the extraction solution (ng / mL)
- ASn Peak area of the compound represented by the general formula (2) having n carbon atoms in the extraction solution The quantitation limit in this measurement is 1 ng / mL.
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (2) having n carbon atoms contained in the aqueous dispersion is represented by the formula (5 ).
- ZSn XSn ⁇ 86.3 (5)
- ZSn content of compound represented by general formula (2) having n carbon atoms contained in the aqueous dispersion (vs. fluoropolymer)
- Synthesis example 1 A mixture of lithium (2.0 g), dimethylphenylchlorosilane (8.4 g) and tetrahydrofuran (120 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours. 4- (tertbutyldimethylsiloxy) -1-morpholinobutan-1-one (10 g) was added to the reaction mixture, and the mixture was stirred at -78 ° C. for 2 hr. A saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution (300 mL) was added to the reaction solution, extracted with ethyl acetate, dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure.
- surfactant A sodium 4,7-dioxododecyl sulfate
- Example 1 A stainless steel autoclave with an internal volume of 6.0 L was charged with 3200 g of ion-exchanged water and 0.1 g of Pluronic 31R1 (manufactured by BASF). 88 g of TFE / VdF mixed monomer 60/40 (mol%) was charged under reduced pressure, and the temperature was raised to 80 ° C. with stirring. Then, an aqueous solution of ammonium persulfate (APS) having a concentration of 27.1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 mol / L dissolved in pure water was supplied with a plunger pump at a flow rate of 7.5 g / min for 2 minutes to initiate polymerization. Thereafter, the plunger pump flow rate was maintained at 0.25 g / min.
- APS ammonium persulfate
- the polymerization pressure was set to 0.90 MPa, and in order to compensate for the pressure drop during the polymerization, 60/40 (mol%) of a TFE / VdF mixed monomer was continuously supplied, and polymerization was performed with stirring.
- the surfactant A solution having a concentration of 26.9 mmol / L dissolved in pure water was started to be fed at a flow rate of 0.58 g / min with a plunger pump until the polymerization was completed. Continued.
- the concentration of the ammonium persulfate (APS) aqueous solution was changed to 13.6 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 mol / L, and the supply was continued with a plunger pump at a flow rate of 7.5 g / min until the polymerization was completed.
- APS ammonium persulfate
- the composition was determined by 19 F-NMR measurement using a nuclear magnetic resonance apparatus at a measurement temperature of (melting point of polymer + 20) ° C.
- Comparative Example 1 A stainless steel autoclave with an internal volume of 6.0 L was charged with 3200 g of ion-exchanged water and 0.1 g of Pluronic 31R1 (manufactured by BASF). Under reduced pressure, 89 g of TFE / VdF mixed monomer 60/40 (mol%) was charged, and the temperature was raised to 80 ° C. with stirring. Then, an aqueous solution of ammonium persulfate (APS) having a concentration of 27.1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 mol / L dissolved in pure water was supplied with a plunger pump at a flow rate of 7.5 g / min for 2 minutes to initiate polymerization. Thereafter, the plunger pump flow rate was maintained at 0.25 g / min.
- APS ammonium persulfate
- the polymerization pressure was set to 0.90 MPa, and in order to compensate for the pressure drop during the polymerization, 60/40 (mol%) of a TFE / VdF mixed monomer was continuously supplied, and polymerization was performed with stirring.
- the amount of introduced monomer reached 175 g, supply of a sodium dodecyl sulfate solution having a concentration of 26.9 mmol / L dissolved in pure water was started at a flow rate of 0.58 g / min with a plunger pump and continued until the end of polymerization. It was.
- the concentration of the ammonium persulfate (APS) aqueous solution was changed to 13.6 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 2 mol / L, and the supply was continued with a plunger pump at a flow rate of 7.5 g / min until the polymerization was completed.
- APS ammonium persulfate
- Example 2 2 mL of the fluoropolymer dispersion obtained in Example 1 was added to 30 mL of methanol, and extracted for 3 hours under ultrasonic vibration.
- Surfactant A is dissolved in methanol to prepare standard solutions of 0.1, 1, 10, 100, and 1000 ppm, respectively.
- the amount of surfactant contained in the extract is measured. As a result, it was 205.8 ppm with respect to water, and was 1400 ppm with respect to the fluoropolymer.
- Example 3 Add 550 g of deionized degassed water, 30 g of paraffin wax, 0.0192 g of surfactant B to a glass autoclave with an internal volume of 1 L, seal the reactor, replace the system with nitrogen, and replace oxygen. Removed.
- the reactor is heated to 70 ° C., TFE is charged into the reactor, and the reactor is brought to 0.78 MPa.
- As a polymerization initiator 0.011 g of ammonium persulfate (APS) was charged. TFE is charged so that the reaction pressure is constant at 0.78 MPa. When 50 g of TFE is charged, stirring is stopped and depressurization is performed until the reactor reaches atmospheric pressure.
- the aqueous dispersion was taken out from the reactor, cooled, and then the paraffin wax was separated.
- the volume average particle diameter of the particles contained in the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 177 nm.
- the solid content of the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 8.2% by mass.
- the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was dried at 150 ° C. for 18 hours.
- the peak temperature during the first temperature increase was observed at 344 ° C. Further, the heat of fusion at this time was 75 J / g.
- SSG was 2.177. From this, it was found that the obtained PTFE was high molecular weight PTFE.
- PTFE aqueous dispersion 2 mL of the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was added to 30 mL (23.8 g) of methanol, and extracted under ultrasonic vibration for 3 hours.
- Surfactant B is dissolved in methanol to prepare standard solutions of 0.1, 1, 10, 100, and 1000 ppm, respectively.
- the amount of surfactant contained in the extract is measured. As a result, it was 32 ppm with respect to the PTFE aqueous dispersion.
- the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion is coagulated by vigorously stirring until solidified, and the obtained aggregate is washed with deionized water, and then the washed aggregate is dried at 150 ° C. for 18 hours to obtain a PTFE powder.
- Example 4 Add 550 g of deionized degassed water, 30 g of paraffin wax, 0.0192 g of surfactant B to a glass autoclave with an internal volume of 1 L, seal the reactor, replace the system with nitrogen, and replace oxygen. Removed. The temperature of the reactor is raised to 85 ° C., TFE is charged into the reactor, and the reactor is brought to 0.78 MPa. As a polymerization initiator, 0.0022 g of ammonium persulfate (APS) and 0.110 g of disuccinic acid peroxide (DSP) were charged. TFE is charged so that the reaction pressure is constant at 0.78 MPa. When 50 g of TFE is charged, stirring is stopped and depressurization is performed until the reactor reaches atmospheric pressure.
- APS ammonium persulfate
- DSP disuccinic acid peroxide
- the aqueous dispersion was taken out of the reactor and cooled, and then the paraffin wax was separated.
- the volume average particle diameter of the particles contained in the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 189 nm.
- solid content of the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 8.2 mass%.
- the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was dried at 150 ° C. for 18 hours.
- peak temperatures during the first temperature increase were observed at 339 ° C. and 343 ° C.
- the heat of fusion at this time was 76 J / g.
- SSG was 2.173.
- the obtained PTFE was high molecular weight PTFE.
- 2 mL of the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was added to 30 mL (23.8 g) of methanol, and extracted under ultrasonic vibration for 3 hours.
- Surfactant B is dissolved in methanol to prepare standard solutions of 0.1, 1, 10, 100, and 1000 ppm, respectively. After preparing a calibration curve by HPLC, the amount of surfactant contained in the extract is measured. As a result, it was 31 ppm with respect to the PTFE aqueous dispersion.
- Example 5 Add 3500 g of deionized degassed water, 100 g of paraffin wax, 0.122 g of surfactant B to an SUS autoclave with an internal volume of 6 L, seal the reactor, replace the system with nitrogen, and replace oxygen. Removed.
- the reactor is heated to 70 ° C., TFE is charged into the reactor, and the reactor is brought to 0.78 MPa.
- As a polymerization initiator 0.070 g of ammonium persulfate (APS) was charged. TFE is charged so that the reaction pressure is constant at 0.78 MPa.
- surfactant B was added 9 times in total, 1.10 g. When 425 g of TFE is charged, stirring is stopped and depressurization is performed until the reactor reaches atmospheric pressure.
- the aqueous dispersion was taken out from the reactor, cooled, and then the paraffin wax was separated.
- the volume average particle diameter of the particles contained in the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 178 nm.
- the solid content of the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 10.7% by mass.
- the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was dried at 150 ° C. for 18 hours.
- the obtained PTFE resin had an SSG of 2.175. From this, it was found that the obtained PTFE was high molecular weight PTFE.
- the pH was adjusted to 10 using aqueous ammonia, and the mixture was allowed to stand at a temperature of 64 ° C. for 14 hours to perform cloud point concentration.
- the supernatant was removed to obtain PTFE concentrate A.
- the nonionic surfactant and water are added to the obtained PTFE concentrate A so that the solid content is 60.0% by mass and the nonionic surfactant concentration (N) is 6.5% by mass.
- PTFE concentrate B The obtained PTFE concentrate B had a viscosity at 25 ° C. of 46 mPa ⁇ s.
- Example 6 To the concentrated liquid A obtained in Example 5, the nonionic surfactant, water, and ammonium lauryl sulfate (1000 ppm with respect to the solid content of PTFE) were added as a viscosity modifier, and the solid content was 60.0% by mass. The nonionic surfactant concentration (N) was adjusted to 6.5% by mass, and PTFE concentrate C was obtained. The obtained PTFE concentrate C had a viscosity at 25 ° C. of 25 mPa ⁇ s and a viscosity at 35 ° C. of 25 mPa ⁇ s.
- Example 7 Deionized water was added to the aqueous PTFE dispersion obtained in Example 5, and the specific gravity (25 ° C.) was adjusted to 1.080. A PTFE aqueous dispersion adjusted in specific gravity was added to a coagulation tank equipped with a stirring blade and a baffle plate, and the temperature was adjusted so that the internal temperature was 34 ° C. Immediately after the adjustment, nitric acid was added and stirring was started. After the start of stirring, it was confirmed that the aqueous dispersion was in a slurry state and a wet PTFE powder was formed, and stirring was further continued.
- the wet PTFE powder was separated by filtration, and the wet PTFE powder and 2.5 L of deionized water were charged into the coagulation tank to wash the polymer powder. After washing, the wet PTFE powder was separated by filtration and left to stand in a hot air circulation dryer at 150 ° C. for 18 hours to obtain a PTFE powder.
- the peaks with n of 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17 and 19 and m of 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 and 18 were below the limit of quantification.
- the quantification limit is 86 ppb in the case of an aqueous dispersion.
- Example 8 Add 3600 g of deionized degassed water, 180 g of paraffin wax, 0.540 g of surfactant B to an SUS autoclave with an internal volume of 6 L, seal the reactor, replace the system with nitrogen, and replace oxygen. Removed. The temperature of the reactor is raised to 70 ° C., TFE is charged into the reactor, and the reactor is brought to 2.76 MPa. As a polymerization initiator, 0.620 g of ammonium persulfate (APS) and 1.488 g of disuccinic acid peroxide (DSP) were charged. TFE is charged so that the reaction pressure is constant at 2.76 MPa. When 330 g of TFE is charged, stirring is stopped and depressurization is performed until the reactor reaches atmospheric pressure.
- APS ammonium persulfate
- DSP disuccinic acid peroxide
- the aqueous dispersion was taken out from the reactor, cooled, and then the paraffin wax was separated.
- the volume average particle diameter of the particles contained in the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 136 nm.
- the solid content of the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was 8.4% by mass.
- the obtained PTFE aqueous dispersion was vigorously stirred until solidified to coagulate, and the obtained aggregate was dried at 150 ° C. for 18 hours to obtain PTFE powder.
- the peak temperature during the first temperature increase was observed at 336 ° C.
- the SSG of the obtained PTFE powder was 2.211.
- Example 9 Add 3600 g of deionized degassed water, 180 g of paraffin wax, 0.540 g of surfactant B to an SUS autoclave with an internal volume of 6 L, seal the reactor, replace the system with nitrogen, and replace oxygen. Removed. The temperature of the reactor is raised to 70 ° C., TFE is charged into the reactor, and the reactor is brought to 2.76 MPa. After adding 0.50 g of oxalic acid as a polymerization initiator, continuous addition of the potassium permanganate aqueous solution was started. TFE was charged so that the reaction pressure was constant at 2.76 MPa. The aqueous permanganate solution was continuously charged until the solid content of potassium permanganate was 0.23 g.
- n was 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, and 19 and m was 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, and 19 were below the limit of quantification.
- the limit of quantification is 13 ppb.
- Example 11 10 g of methanol (12.6 mL) was added to 10 g of the PTFE powder obtained in Example 8 and subjected to ultrasonic treatment for 60 minutes to extract a supernatant C containing the compound represented by the general formula (2). Supernatant C was measured using the method for measuring the content of the compound represented by the general formula (2) shown above. The results are shown in Table 11 below. The limit of quantification is 1.3 ppb.
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
- Addition Polymer Or Copolymer, Post-Treatments, Or Chemical Modifications (AREA)
- Emulsifying, Dispersing, Foam-Producing Or Wetting Agents (AREA)
- Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
- Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
Abstract
Description
からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種であることを特徴とするフルオロポリマーの製造方法である。
一般式(3):(H-(CF2)8-SO3)qM2
(式中、M2はH、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。qは1又は2である。)
一般式(4):(H-(CF2)7-COO)pM1
(式中、M1は、H、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。pは1又は2である。)
本発明の製造方法は、上記界面活性剤の存在下に重合を行うものであるので、高い分子量を有するフルオロポリマーを製造でき、得られるフルオロポリマーに上記界面活性剤が残留しにくい。
当該「有機基」の例は、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルケニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルキニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルケニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルカジエニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアリール基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアラルキル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよい非芳香族複素環基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいヘテロアリール基、
シアノ基、
ホルミル基、
RaO-、
RaCO-、
RaSO2-、
RaCOO-、
RaNRaCO-、
RaCONRa-、
RaOCO-、
RaOSO2-、及び、
RaNRbSO2-
(これらの式中、Raは、独立して、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルケニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルキニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルケニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいシクロアルカジエニル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアリール基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアラルキル基、
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよい非芳香族複素環基、又は
1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいヘテロアリール基、
Rbは、独立して、H又は1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基である)
を包含する。
上記有機基としては、1個以上の置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基が好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、炭素数が3以上の場合、2つの炭素原子間にカルボニル基(-C(=O)-)を含んでもよい。また、上記アルキル基は、炭素数が2以上の場合、上記アルキル基の末端に上記カルボニル基を含むこともできる。すなわち、CH3-C(=O)-で示されるアセチル基等のアシル基も、上記アルキル基に含まれる。
また、上記アルキル基は、炭素数が3以上の場合は1価又は2価の複素環を含むこともできるし、環を形成することもできる。上記複素環としては、不飽和複素環が好ましく、含酸素不飽和複素環がより好ましく、例えば、フラン環等が挙げられる。R1aにおいて、2価の複素環が2つの炭素原子間に挿入されていてもよいし、2価の複素環が末端に位置して-C(=O)-と結合してもよいし、1価の複素環が上記アルキル基の末端に位置してもよい。
上記エステル結合を含む1価の有機基としては、式:-O-C(=O)-R101a(式中、R101aはアルキル基)で示される基が挙げられる。
上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
R2a及びR3aは、独立に、単結合又は炭素数1以上の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキレン基又は炭素数3以上の環状のアルキレン基であることが好ましい。
R2a及びR3aを構成する上記アルキレン基は、カルボニル基を含まないことが好ましい。
上記エステル結合を含む1価の有機基としては、式:-O-C(=O)-R102a(式中、R102aはアルキル基)で示される基が挙げられる。
上記アルキレン基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキレン基であることが好ましい。
R1a、R2a及びR3aは、いずれか2つがお互いに結合して、環を形成してもよい。
Xaとしては、H、アルカリ金属(1族)、アルカリ土類金属(2族)又はNR4a 4が好ましく、水に溶解しやすいことから、H、Na、K、Li又はNH4がより好ましく、水に更に溶解しやすいことから、Na、K又はNH4が更に好ましく、Na又はNH4が特に好ましく、除去が容易であることから、NH4が最も好ましい。XaがNH4であると、上記界面活性剤の水性媒体への溶解性が優れるとともに、フルオロポリマー中又は最終製品中に金属成分が残留しにくい。
R11aとしての上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子が官能基により置換されていてもよく、例えば、ヒドロキシ基(-OH)又はエステル結合を含む1価の有機基により置換されていてもよいが、如何なる官能基によっても置換されていないことが好ましい。
上記エステル結合を含む1価の有機基としては、式:-O-C(=O)-R103a(式中、R103aはアルキル基)で示される基が挙げられる。
R11aとしての上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
R12aとしての上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状であってよい。
R12aとしての上記アルキレン基は、カルボニル基を含まないことが好ましい。R12aとしては、エチレン基(-C2H4-)又はプロピレン基(-C3H6-)がより好ましい。
R12aとしての上記アルキレン基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子が官能基により置換されていてもよく、例えば、ヒドロキシ基(-OH)又はエステル結合を含む1価の有機基により置換されていてもよいが、如何なる官能基によっても置換されていないことが好ましい。
上記エステル結合を含む1価の有機基としては、式:-O-C(=O)-R104a(式中、R104aはアルキル基)で示される基が挙げられる。
R12aとしての上記アルキレン基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキレン基であることが好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、炭素数が3以上の場合は1価又は2価の複素環を含むこともできるし、環を形成することもできる。上記複素環としては、不飽和複素環が好ましく、含酸素不飽和複素環がより好ましく、例えば、フラン環等が挙げられる。R1bにおいて、2価の複素環が2つの炭素原子間に挿入されていてもよいし、2価の複素環が末端に位置して-C(=O)-と結合してもよいし、1価の複素環が上記アルキル基の末端に位置してもよい。
上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、如何なる置換基も有していないことが好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、如何なる置換基も有していないことが好ましい。
上記アルキレン基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
上記アルキレン基は、如何なる置換基も有していないことが好ましい。
Xbとしては、H、アルカリ金属(1族)、アルカリ土類金属(2族)又はNR5b 4が好ましく、水に溶解しやすいことから、H、Na、K、Li又はNH4がより好ましく、水に更に溶解しやすいことから、Na、K又はNH4が更に好ましく、Na又はNH4が特に好ましく、除去が容易であることから、NH4が最も好ましい。XbがNH4であると、上記界面活性剤の水性媒体への溶解性が優れるとともに、フルオロポリマー中又は最終製品中に金属成分が残留しにくい。
化合物(11a)と、式:
化合物(12a)が有する脱離基を脱離させて、式:
化合物(13a)と、式:
工程(11a)における上記シロキシリチウム化合物と化合物(10a)との反応の温度としては、-100~0℃が好ましく、-80~-50℃がより好ましい。
工程(11a)における上記シロキシリチウム化合物と化合物(10a)との反応の圧力としては、0.1~5MPaが好ましく、0.1~1MPaがより好ましい。
工程(11a)における上記シロキシリチウム化合物と化合物(10a)との反応の時間としては、0.1~72時間が好ましく、1~2時間がより好ましい。
化合物(21a)が有する脱離基を脱離させて、式:
化合物(22a)と、式:
R23aとしては、炭素数1以上の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。
R24aとしては、炭素数1以上の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキレン基が好ましく、メチレン基(-CH2-)がより好ましい。
(式中、R3aは上述のとおり、Yaはハロゲン原子、Eaは脱離基である。)で示されるハロゲン化アルキルと、式:
化合物(31a)を酸化して、式
化合物(32a)が有する脱離基を脱離させて、式:
化合物(33a)と、式:
で示される化合物(41a)を得る工程(41a)、及び、
化合物(41a)に、式:
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
(CH3)3CC(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
(CH3)2CHC(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
(CH2)5CHC(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OCH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)NHCH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2NHC(O)CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)OCH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OC(O)CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3H、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Li、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3K、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3NH4、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH(CH3)2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
(CH3)3CC(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
(CH3)2CHC(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
(CH2)5CHC(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OCH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)NHCH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2NHC(O)CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)OCH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OC(O)CH2CH2OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)OSO3Na、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3H、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Li、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3K、
CH3CH2C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3NH4、
CH3C(O)CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2OSO3Na等が挙げられる。
R11b-CH=CH-(CR2b 2)n-(OR3b)p-(CR4b 2)q-L-OH
(式中、R2b~R4b、n、p及びqは、上記のとおり。R11bは、H、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、又は、置換基を有してもよい炭素数3以上の環状のアルキル基であり、炭素数が3以上の場合は1価又は2価の複素環を含んでも環を形成していてもよい。Lは、単結合、-CO2-B-*、-OCO-B-*、-CONR6b-B-*、-NR6bCO-B-*、又は、-CO-(但し、-CO2-B-、-OCO-B-、-CONR6b-B-、-NR6bCO-B-に含まれるカルボニル基を除く。)であり、Bは単結合もしくは置換基を有してもよい炭素数1から10のアルキレン基であり、R6bは、H又は置換基を有していてもよい、炭素数1~4のアルキル基である。*は、式中の-OHに結合する側を指す。)で示される化合物(10b)をヒドロキシ化して、下記式:
化合物(11b)を酸化して、下記式:
化合物(12b)を硫酸エステル化して、下記式:
R11bとしての上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、如何なる置換基も有していないことが好ましい。
化合物(21b)を硫酸エステル化して、下記式:
R21b-CH=CH-(CR2b 2)n-(OR3b)p-(CR4b 2)q-L-OH
(式中、L、Rb2~R4b、n、p及びqは、上記のとおり。R21bは、H、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、又は、置換基を有してもよい炭素数3以上の環状のアルキル基であり、炭素数が3以上の場合は1価又は2価の複素環を含んでも環を形成していてもよい。)で示される化合物(30b)をエポキシ化して、下記式:
化合物(31b)と、R22b 2CuLi(R22bは、置換基を有してもよい炭素数1以上の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基又は置換基を有してもよい炭素数3以上の環状のアルキル基であり、炭素数が3以上の場合は1価又は2価の複素環を含んでも環を形成していてもよい。)で示されるジアルキル銅リチウムとを反応させて、下記式:
化合物(32b)を酸化して、下記式:
化合物(33b)を硫酸エステル化して、下記式:
R21bとしての上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、如何なる置換基も有していないことが好ましい。
R22bとしての上記アルキル基は、炭素原子に結合した水素原子の75%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、50%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよく、25%以下がハロゲン原子により置換されていてもよいが、フッ素原子、塩素原子等のハロゲン原子を含まない非ハロゲン化アルキル基であることが好ましい。
上記アルキル基は、如何なる置換基も有していないことが好ましい。
上記エポキシ化剤は、化合物(30b)1モルに対して、0.5~10.0モルの量で使用できる。
R11b-CH=CH-(CR2b 2)n-(OR3b)p-(CR4b 2)q-L-OH
(式中、L、R2b~R4b、R11b、n、p及びqは、上記のとおり。)で示される化合物(10b)を酸化して、下記式:
化合物(41b)を硫酸エステル化して、下記式:
上記酸化剤は、化合物(10b)1モルに対して、0.001~10モルの量で使用できる。
R11b-CH=CH-(CR2b 2)n-OH
(式中、R2b、R11b及びnは、上記のとおり。)で示される化合物(50)とハロゲン化剤とを反応させて、下記式:
R11b-CH=CH-(CR2b 2)n-Z51b
(式中、R2b、R11b及びnは、上記のとおり。Z51bは、ハロゲン原子である。)で示される化合物(51)を得る工程(51)、
化合物(51)と、HO-R3b-L-OH(L、R3bは、上記のとおり。)で示されるアルキレングリコールとを反応させて、下記式:
R11b-CH=CH-(CR2b 2)n-O-R3b-L-OH
(式中、L、R2b、R3b、R11b及びnは、上記のとおり。)で示される化合物(52)を得る工程(52)、
化合物(52)を酸化して、下記式:
化合物(53)を硫酸エステル化して、下記式:
上記ハロゲン化剤は、化合物(50)1モルに対して、0.5~10.0モルの量で使用できる。
上記ホスフィン類は、化合物(50)1モルに対して、0.5~10.0モルの量で使用できる。
上記塩基は、化合物(51)1モルに対して、0.5~10.0モルの量で使用できる。
からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の界面活性剤(1)と水とを含む水溶液であっても良い。
上記フルオロモノマーとしては、テトラフルオロエチレン[TFE]、ヘキサフルオロプロピレン[HFP]、クロロトリフルオロエチレン[CTFE]、フッ化ビニル、フッ化ビニリデン[VDF]、トリフルオロエチレン、フルオロアルキルビニルエーテル、フルオロアルキルエチレン、トリフルオロプロピレン、ペンタフルオロプロピレン、トリフルオロブテン、テトラフルオロイソブテン、ヘキサフルオロイソブテン、一般式(100):CH2=CFRf101(式中、Rf101は炭素数1~12の直鎖又は分岐したフルオロアルキル基)で表されるフルオロモノマー、フッ素化ビニルヘテロ環状体、及び、架橋部位を与えるモノマーからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種であることが好ましい。
一般式(110):CF2=CF-ORf111
(式中、Rf111は、パーフルオロ有機基を表す。)で表されるフルオロモノマー、
一般式(120):CF2=CF-OCH2-Rf121
(式中、Rf121は、炭素数1~5のパーフルオロアルキル基)で表されるフルオロモノマー、
一般式(130):CF2=CFOCF2ORf131
(式中、Rf131は炭素数1~6の直鎖又は分岐状パーフルオロアルキル基、炭素数5~6の環式パーフルオロアルキル基、1~3個の酸素原子を含む炭素数2~6の直鎖又は分岐状パーフルオロオキシアルキル基である。)で表されるフルオロモノマー、
一般式(140):CF2=CFO(CF2CF(Y141)O)m(CF2)nF
(式中、Y141はフッ素原子又はトリフルオロメチル基を表す。mは1~4の整数である。nは1~4の整数である。)で表されるフルオロモノマー、及び、
一般式(150):CF2=CF-O-(CF2CFY151-O)n-(CFY152)m-A151
(式中、Y151は、フッ素原子、塩素原子、-SO2F基又はパーフルオロアルキル基を表す。パーフルオロアルキル基は、エーテル性の酸素及び-SO2F基を含んでもよい。nは、0~3の整数を表す。n個のY151は、同一であってもよいし異なっていてもよい。Y152は、フッ素原子、塩素原子又は-SO2F基を表す。mは、1~5の整数を表す。m個のY152は、同一であってもよいし異なっていてもよい。A151は、-SO2X151、-COZ151又は-POZ152Z153を表す。X151は、F、Cl、Br、I、-OR151又は-NR152R153を表す。Z151、Z152及びZ153は、同一又は異なって、-NR154R155又は-OR156を表す。R151、R152、R153、R154、R155及びR156は、同一又は異なって、H、アンモニウム、アルカリ金属、フッ素原子を含んでも良いアルキル基、アリール基、若しくはスルホニル含有基を表す。)で表されるフルオロモノマー
からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種であることが好ましい。
一般式(110)で表されるフルオロモノマーとしては、更に、上記一般式(110)において、Rf111が炭素数4~9のパーフルオロ(アルコキシアルキル)基であるもの、Rf111が下記式:
一般式(170):CH2=CH-(CF2)n-X171
(式中、X171はH又はFであり、nは3~10の整数である。)で表されるフルオロアルキルエチレンが好ましく、CH2=CH-C4F9、及び、CH2=CH-C6F13からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種であることがより好ましい。
一般式(180):CX181 2=CX182-Rf 181CHR181X183
(式中、X181及びX182は、独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子又はCH3、Rf 181は、フルオロアルキレン基、パーフルオロアルキレン基、フルオロ(ポリ)オキシアルキレン基又はパーフルオロ(ポリ)オキシアルキレン基、R181は、水素原子又はCH3、X183は、ヨウ素原子又は臭素原子である。)で表されるフルオロモノマー、
一般式(190):CX191 2=CX192-Rf 191X193
(式中、X191及びX192は、独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子又はCH3、Rf 191は、フルオロアルキレン基、パーフルオロアルキレン基、フルオロポリオキシアルキレン基又はパーフルオロポリオキシアルキレン基、X193は、ヨウ素原子又は臭素原子である。)で表されるフルオロモノマー、
一般式(200):CF2=CFO(CF2CF(CF3)O)m(CF2)n-X201
(式中、mは0~5の整数、nは1~3の整数、X201は、シアノ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヨウ素原子、臭素原子、又は、-CH2Iである。)で表されるフルオロモノマー、及び、
一般式(210):CH2=CFCF2O(CF(CF3)CF2O)m(CF(CF3))n-X211
(式中、mは0~5の整数、nは1~3の整数、X211は、シアノ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヨウ素原子、臭素原子、又は-CH2OHである。)で表されるフルオロモノマー、及び、
一般式(220):CR221R222=CR223-Z221-CR224=CR225R226
(式中、R221、R222、R223、R224、R225及びR226は、同一又は異なって、水素原子又は炭素数1~5のアルキル基である。Z221は、直鎖又は分岐状で酸素原子を有していてもよい、炭素数1~18のアルキレン基、炭素数3~18のシクロアルキレン基、少なくとも部分的にフッ素化している炭素数1~10のアルキレン基若しくはオキシアルキレン基、又は、
-(Q)p-CF2O-(CF2CF2O)m(CF2O)n-CF2-(Q)p-
(式中、Qはアルキレン基またはオキシアルキレン基である。pは0または1である。m/nが0.2~5である。)で表され、分子量が500~10000である(パー)フルオロポリオキシアルキレン基である。)で表されるモノマー
からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種であることが好ましい。
一般式(240):Rf241-(X241)n-Y241
(式中、Rf241は1~12個の炭素原子を有する部分フッ素化アルキル基又は完全フッ素化アルキル基であり、nは0又は1であり、X241は-O-、-COO-又は-OCO-であり、Y241は-(CH2)pH、-(CH2)pOH又は-(OR241)q(OR242)rOHであり、pは1~12の整数であり、qは1~12の整数であり、rは0~12の整数であり、R241及びR242は2~4個の炭素原子を有するアルキレン基である。但しR241とR242とはお互いに異なる。)で表される化合物、
一般式(250):H(OR251)u(OR252)vOH
(式中、R251及びR252は、1~4個の炭素原子を有するアルキレン基であり、u及びvは1~5の整数である。但しR251とR252とはお互いに異なる。)で表されるブロックポリマー、
炭素数が8~20個の炭化水素基からなる疎水基および、ポリアルキレンオキサイドからなる親水基を分子内に有する非イオン性界面活性剤、及び、
一般式(260):R261 m-Si-(OR262)4-m
(式中、R261は1~12個の炭素原子を有するアルキル基、R262は1~4個の炭素原子を有するアルキル基であり、mは1~3の整数である。)で表されるケイ素化合物、
からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種が好ましい。
(-CFCF3-CF2-O-)n (VII)
(-CF2-CF2-CF2-O-)n (VIII)
(-CF2-CF2-O-)n-(-CF2-O-)m (IX)
(-CF2-CFCF3-O-)n-(-CF2-O-)m (X)
X15:n=1.5(avg)
X45:n=4.5(avg)
TMN-6:n=8(avg)
TMN-10:n=11(avg)
TMN-100:n=10(avg)
31R1:m=26(avg)、n=8(avg)
17R2:m=14(avg)、n=9(avg)
10R5:m=8(avg)、n=22(avg)
25R4:m=22(avg)、n=23(avg)
TDA-6:n=6(avg)
TDA-9:n=9(avg)
TDA-10:n=19(avg)
CF2=CF-(CF2)n271a-Y271
(式中、n271aは、1~10の整数を表し、Y271は、-SO3M271又は-COOM271を表し、M271は、H、NH4又はアルカリ金属を表す。)で表される界面活性剤、一般式(270b):
CF2=CF-(CF2C(CF3)F)n271b-Y271
(式中、n271bは、1~5の整数を表し、Y271は、前記定義と同じ。)で表される界面活性剤、一般式(270c):
CF2=CF-O-(CFX271)n271c-Y271
(式中、X271は、F又はCF3を表し、n271cは、1~10の整数を表し、Y271は、前記定義と同じ。)で表される界面活性剤、一般式(270d)
CF2=CF-O-(CF2CFX271O)n271d-CF2CF2-Y271
(式中、n271dは、1~10の整数を表し、Y271及びX271は、前記定義と同じ。)で表される界面活性剤、一般式:(270e)
CX272 2=CFCF2-O-(CF(CF3)CF2O)n271e-CF(CF3)-Y271
(式中、各X272は、同一であり、F又はHを表す。n271eは、0又は1~10の整数を表し、Y271は、前記定義と同じ。)で表される界面活性剤等が挙げられる。
RaIxBry
(式中、xおよびyはそれぞれ0~2の整数であり、かつ1≦x+y≦2を満たすものであり、Raは炭素数1~16の飽和もしくは不飽和のフルオロ炭化水素基またはクロロフルオロ炭化水素基、または炭素数1~3の炭化水素基であり、酸素原子を含んでいてもよい)で表される化合物があげられる。臭素化合物又はヨウ素化合物を使用することによって、ヨウ素または臭素が重合体に導入され、架橋点として機能する。
(式)
フッ素置換率(%)=(フルオロポリマーを構成する炭素原子に結合するフッ素原子の個数)/((フルオロポリマーを構成する炭素原子に結合する水素原子の個数)+(フルオロポリマーを構成する炭素原子に結合するフッ素原子及び塩素原子の個数))×100
コア:TFE単独重合体 シェル:TFE単独重合体
コア:変性PTFE シェル:TFE単独重合体
コア:変性PTFE シェル:変性PTFE
コア:TFE単独重合体 シェル:変性PTFE
コア:低分子量PTFE シェル:高分子量PTFE
コア:高分子量PTFE シェル:低分子量PTFE
本発明の製造方法において、TFEの重合は、通常、重合温度10~150℃、重合圧力0.05~5MPaGにて行われる。
上記固形分濃度の下限は5質量%が好ましく、8質量%がより好ましい。上限は特に限定されないが40質量%であってもよく、35質量%であってもよい。
上記平均一次粒子径の下限は100nmが好ましく、150nmがより好ましい。上限は400nmが好ましく、350nmがより好ましい。
上記TFE重合体の水性分散液は、例えば、国際公開第2007/004250号に記載の塵埃抑制処理剤組成物に好適に用いることができ、国際公開第2007/000812号に記載の塵埃抑制処理方法にも好適に用いることができる。
好ましくは、シート状または棒状のペースト押出物を押出方向にロール延伸することで、一軸延伸膜を得ることができる。
更に、テンター等により幅方向に延伸して、二軸延伸膜も得ることができる。
延伸前に半焼成処理を行うことも好ましい。
エアフィルター、薬液フィルター等の各種精密濾過フィルターの濾材、高分子電解質膜の支持材等として好適に利用できる。
また、繊維分野、医療分野、エレクトロケミカル分野、シール材分野、空気濾過分野、換気/内圧調整分野、液濾過分野、一般消費材分野等で使用する製品の素材としても有用である。
以下に、具体的な用途を例示する。
誘電材料プリプレグ、EMI遮蔽材料、伝熱材料等。より詳細には、プリント配線基板、電磁遮蔽シールド材、絶縁伝熱材料、絶縁材料等。
シール材分野
ガスケット、パッキン、ポンプダイアフラム、ポンプチューブ、航空機用シール材等。
ULPAフィルター(半導体製造用)、HEPAフィルター(病院・半導体製造用)、円筒カートリッジフィルター(産業用)、バグフィルター(産業用)、耐熱バグフィルタ-(排ガス処理用)、耐熱プリーツフィルター(排ガス処理用)、SINBRANフィルター(産業用)、触媒フィルター(排ガス処理用)、吸着剤付フィルター(HDD組込み)、吸着剤付ベントフィルター(HDD組込み用)、ベントフィルター(HDD組込み用他)、掃除機用フィルター(掃除機用)、汎用複層フェルト材、GT用カートリッジフィルター(GT向け互換品用)、クーリングフィルター(電子機器筐体用)等。
凍結乾燥用の容器等の凍結乾燥用材料、電子回路やランプ向けの自動車用換気材料、容器キャップ向け等の容器用途、タブレット端末や携帯電話端末等の小型端末を含む電子機器向け等の保護換気用途、医療用換気用途等。
半導体液ろ過フィルター(半導体製造用)、親水性PTFEフィルター(半導体製造用)、化学薬品向けフィルター(薬液処理用)、純水製造ライン用フィルター(純水製造用)、逆洗型液ろ過フィルター(産業排水処理用)等。
衣類、ケーブルガイド(バイク向け可動ワイヤ)、バイク用衣服、キャストライナー(医療サポーター)、掃除機フィルター、バグパイプ(楽器)、ケーブル(ギター用信号ケーブル等)、弦(弦楽器用)等。
PTFE繊維(繊維材料)、ミシン糸(テキスタイル)、織糸(テキスタイル)、ロープ等。
体内埋設物(延伸品)、人工血管、カテーテル、一般手術(組織補強材料)、頭頸部製品(硬膜代替)、口内健康(組織再生医療)、整形外科(包帯)等。
低分子量PTFEは、重合により製造しても良いし、重合で得られた高分子量PTFEを公知の方法(熱分解、放射線照射分解等)で低分子量化して製造することもできる。
(1)本発明の製造方法において、FEPの重合は、重合温度10~150℃、重合圧力0.3~6.0MpaGにて行うことが好ましい。
ETFEシートにおける添加剤の含有量は、ETFEシートの総質量に対し、20質量%以下が好ましく、10質量%以下が特に好ましい。
また、膜構造建築物の膜材だけではなく、たとえば、屋外使用板材(防音壁、防風フェンス、越波柵、車庫天蓋、ショッピングモール、歩行路壁、屋根材)、ガラス飛散防止フィルム、耐熱・耐水シート、建材等(テント倉庫のテント材、日よけ用膜材、明かり取り用の部分屋根材、ガラスに替わる窓材、防炎仕切り用膜材、カーテン、外壁補強、防水膜、防煙膜、不燃透明仕切り、道路補強、インテリア(照明、壁面、ブランド等)、エクステリア(テント、看板等)等)、生活レジャー用品(釣りざお、ラケット、ゴルフクラブ、映写幕等)、自動車用材料(幌、制振材、ボディ等)、航空機材料、船舶材料、家電外装、タンク、容器内壁、フィルタ、工事用膜材、電子材料(プリント基板、配線基板、絶縁膜、離型膜等)、太陽電池モジュールの表面材料、太陽熱発電用のミラー保護材、ソーラー温水器の表面材等に有用である。
上記電線としては、例えばケーブル、ワイヤ等が挙げられる。本発明の電線としては、同軸ケーブル、高周波用ケーブル、フラットケーブル、耐熱ケーブル等が挙げられる。
一般式(150):CF2=CF-O-(CF2CFY151-O)n-(CFY152)m-A151
(式中、Y151は、フッ素原子、塩素原子、-SO2F基又はパーフルオロアルキル基を表す。パーフルオロアルキル基は、エーテル性の酸素及び-SO2F基を含んでもよい。nは、0~3の整数を表す。n個のY151は、同一であってもよいし異なっていてもよい。Y152は、フッ素原子、塩素原子又は-SO2F基を表す。mは、1~5の整数を表す。m個のY152は、同一であってもよいし異なっていてもよい。A151は、-SO2X151、-COZ151又は-POZ152Z153を表す。X151は、F、Cl、Br、I、-OR151又は-NR152R153を表す。Z151、Z152及びZ153は、同一又は異なって、-NR154R155又は-OR156を表す。R151、R152、R153、R154、R155及びR156は、同一又は異なって、H、アンモニウム、アルカリ金属、フッ素原子を含んでも良いアルキル基、アリール基、若しくはスルホニル含有基を表す。)で表されるフルオロモノマーを挙げることができる。電解質ポリマー前駆体の好ましい単量体組成(モル%)は、TFE:ビニルエーテル=(50~99):(50~1)であり、より好ましくは、TFE:ビニルエーテル=(50~93):(50~7)である。
また、電解質ポリマー前駆体の分散状態を維持したまま、アルカリ溶液による加水分解を施すことにより電解質ポリマー分散液を得ることができる。
引き続き、加圧容器内で、120℃以上に加熱することで、例えば、水/アルコール混合溶媒に溶解させ、溶液状態にすることが出来る。
このようにして得られた溶液は、例えば電極のバインダーとして使用したり、種々の添加剤と複合してキャスト製膜し、例えば防汚塗膜や有機アクチュエーター等に使用することができる。
本発明の製造方法において、TFE/VDF共重合体の重合温度としては特に限定されず、0~100℃であってよい。重合圧力は、重合温度等の他の重合条件に応じて適宜定められるが、通常、0~9.8MPaGであってよい。
式: CX11X12=CX13(CX14X15)n11X16
(式中、X11~X16は同一または異なってH、F又はClを表し、n11は0~8の整数を表す。但し、TFE及びVDFを除く。)で示されるモノマー、又は、
式: CX21X22=CX23-O(CX24X25)n21X26
(式中、X21~X26は同一または異なってH、F又はClを表し、n21は0~8の整数を表す。)で示されるモノマーが好ましい。
本発明の製造方法において、上記フッ素ゴムの重合は、攪拌機を備えた耐圧の反応容器に純水及び上記界面活性剤を仕込み、脱酸素後、モノマーを仕込み、所定の温度にし、重合開始剤を添加して、反応を開始する。反応の進行とともに圧力が低下するので、初期圧力を維持するように、追加のモノマーを連続的又は間欠的に追加供給する。所定量のモノマーを供給した時点で、供給を停止し、反応容器内のモノマーをパージし、温度を室温に戻して反応を終了する。この場合、ポリマーラテックスを連続的に反応容器より取り出すことができる。
アニオン性界面活性剤としては、アルキルスルホネート、アルキルサルフェート、アルキルアリールサルフェート及びそれらの塩;脂肪族(カルボン)酸及びその塩;リン酸アルキルエステル、リン酸アルキルアリールエステル又はそれらの塩;等が挙げられるが、中でも、アルキルスルホネート、アルキルサルフェート、脂肪族カルボン酸またはそれらの塩が好ましい。
アルキルサルフェートまたはその塩としては、ラウリル硫酸アンモニウム、またはラウリル硫酸ナトリウム等が好ましい。
脂肪族カルボン酸またはその塩としては、コハク酸、デカン酸、ウンデカン酸、ウンデセン酸、ラウリン酸、ハイドロドデカン酸、またはそれらの塩が好ましい。
アニオン性界面活性剤の添加量の下限としては、50ppm以上がより好ましく、100ppm以上が更に好ましい。添加量が少なすぎると、粘度調整効果が乏しい。
アニオン性界面活性剤の添加量の上限としては、3000ppm以下がより好ましく、2000ppm以下が更に好ましい。添加量が多すぎると水性分散液の機械的安定性、貯蔵安定性が損なわれることがある。
上記その他の高分子化合物としては特に限定されず、例えば、ポリエチレンオキサイド(分散安定剤)、ポリエチレングリコール(分散安定剤)、フェノール樹脂、尿素樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、アクリルシリコーン樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、シリコーンポリエステル樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂等が挙げられる。
上記排水中の未凝集の上記フルオロポリマー濃度は、生産性の観点から低いことが好ましく、0.4質量%未満がより好ましく、0.3質量%未満が特に好ましい。
一般式(3):(H-(CF2)8-SO3)qM2
(式中、M2はH、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。qは1又は2である。)
下記一般式(3)で示される化合物を、フルオロポリマーに対して、500ppb以上含むことを特徴とする組成物でもある。
一般式(3):(H-(CF2)8-SO3)qM2
(式中、M2はH、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。qは1又は2である。)
一般式(3)で示される化合物の含有量は、フルオロポリマーに対して、500~20000ppbであってもよい。一般式(3)で示される化合物の含有量の上限は10000ppbであってもよい。一般式(3)で示される化合物の含有量の下限は1000ppb超であってもよく、1100ppbであってもよく、2000ppbであってもよく、3000ppbであってもよい。一般式(3)で示される化合物の含有量は、フルオロポリマーに対して、1000ppb超、20000ppb以下であってもよい。
一般式(4):(H-(CF2)7-COO)pM1
(式中、M1は、H、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。pは1又は2である。)
本明細書において、平均粒径は、低分子量PTFEである場合、レーザー回折式粒度分布測定装置(日本レーザー社製)を用い、カスケードは使用せず、圧力0.1MPa、測定時間3秒で粒度分布を測定し、得られた粒度分布積算の50%に対応する粒子径である。
また、高分子量PTFEの場合、上記平均粒径は、JIS K6891に準拠して測定した値である。
上記粉末の色調L*は、JIS Z8781-4に準拠して、測色色差計(CIELABカラースケール)を用いて測定する。
上記焼成は、385℃に加熱した電気炉内で10分間熱処理することで実施する。
ΔL*(%)=(L*t-L*i)/(L*Std-L*i)×100
L*i=初期の色調であって、フッ素化処理前のPTFEに係るCIELABスケールにおけるL*の計測値。
L*t=処理済の色調であって、フッ素化処理後のPTFEに係るCIELABスケールにおけるL*の計測値。
L*Std=87.3
本発明の組成物は、炭化水素系界面活性剤を含んでよい。炭化水素系界面活性剤としては、上述した界面活性剤(a)、(b)等が挙げられる。
上記組成物は、上記フルオロポリマー、炭化水素系界面活性剤以外にも、顔料や充填剤等の従来公知の添加剤を添加することができる。上記添加剤は、本発明の効果を妨げない範囲で使用すればよい。
本発明の成形体は、上記組成物を公知の方法により成形することによって製造できる。成形方法としては、押出成形、射出成形、圧縮成形、ブロー成形等が挙げられる。
固形分含有量を約0.02質量%に希釈し、単位長さに対する550nmの投射光の透過率と電子顕微鏡写真によって決定された平均一次粒子径との検量線を基にして、上記透過率から間接的に求めた。
上記透過率の測定は、動的光散乱測定装置マイクロトラック9340UPA(Honeywell社製)を用いて測定した。
動的光散乱法により測定される。フルオロポリマー固形分濃度1.0質量%に調整したフルオロポリマー水性分散液を作成し、ELSZ-1000S(大塚電子株式会社製)を使用して25℃、積算70回にて測定した。溶媒(水)の屈折率は1.3328、溶媒(水)の粘度は0.8878mPa・sとした。
フルオロポリマー水性分散液を水で固形分濃度が0.15質量%になるまで希釈し、得られた希釈ラテックスの単位長さに対する550nmの投射光の透過率と、透過型電子顕微鏡写真により定方向径を測定して決定した数基準長さ平均粒子径とを測定して、検量線を作成する。この検量線を用いて、各試料の550nmの投射光の実測透過率から数平均粒子径を決定した。
ASTM D3307-01に準拠し、メルトインデクサー(東洋精機社製)を用いて、297℃、5kg荷重下で内径2mm、長さ8mmのノズルから10分間あたりに流出するポリマーの質量(g/10分)をMFRとした。
フルオロポリマー水性分散液1gを、送風乾燥機中で150℃、60分の条件で乾燥し、水性分散液の質量(1g)に対する、加熱残分の質量の割合を百分率で表した値を採用した。
重合により得られた300℃以上の温度に加熱した履歴のないPTFE樹脂について、示差走査熱量計〔DSC〕を用いて、昇温速度10℃/分の条件にて1回目の昇温時の融解熱曲線を描き、上記融解熱曲線に現れる吸熱ピークに対応する温度をPTFE樹脂のピーク温度とした。1回目の昇温時のピーク温度のうち、極大値に対応する温度が上記PTFE樹脂の第1融点である。
重合により得られた300℃以上の温度に加熱した履歴のないPTFE樹脂について、示差走査熱量計〔DSC〕を用いて、昇温速度10℃/分の条件にて融解熱曲線を描き、上記融解熱曲線上の290~350℃までを結ぶ直線と上記融解熱曲線とで囲まれた領域の面積から算出した。
ASTM D4895-89に準拠して成形されたサンプルを用い、ASTM D-792に準拠した水置換法により測定した。
試料約1g(Xg)を直径5cmのアルミカップにとり、100℃にて1時間で加熱した加熱残分(Yg)、更に、得られた加熱残分(Yg)を300℃にて1時間加熱した加熱残分(Zg)より、式:N=[(Y-Z)/Z]×100(%)から算出した。
B型回転粘度計(東京計器社製)を用い、JIS K 6893に準拠して、25℃又は35℃における粘度を測定した。
下記では、下記一般式(1)及び(2)で示される化合物の含有量を測定する方法を説明する。
一般式(1):(H-(CF2)m-COO)pM1(式中、mは3~19、M1は、H、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。pは1又は2である。)
一般式(2):(H-(CF2)n-SO3)qM2(式中、nは4~20である。M2はH、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。qは1又は2である。)
粉末からの抽出
粉末1gにメタノール10g(12.6mL)を加え、60分間の超音波処理を行い、一般式(1)で示される化合物を含む上澄み液を抽出した。
水性分散液の固形分を測定し、PTFE固形分0.5gに相当する量の水性分散液を100mLスクリュー管に秤量した。その後、水性分散液中に含まれている水と合わせ、抽出溶媒が40g(43.14mL)の水/メタノール=50/50vol%となるように水とメタノールを加えた。その後、凝析するまでよく振とうした。固形分を取り除き、液相を4000rpmで1時間遠心分離を行い、一般式(1)で示される化合物を含む上澄み液を抽出した。
抽出液に含まれる一般式(1)で示される化合物の含有量はパーフルオロオクタン酸に換算することにより求めた。
1ng/mL~100ng/mLの濃度既知のパーフルオロオクタン酸のメタノール標準溶液を5水準調製し、液体クロマトグラフ質量分析計(Waters, LC-MS ACQUITY UPLC/TQD)を用いて測定を行った。それぞれのサンプル濃度とピークの積分値から一次近似を用い、関係式(1)によりa、bを求めた。
A=a×X+b (1)
A:パーフルオロオクタン酸のピーク面積
X:パーフルオロオクタン酸の濃度(ng/mL)
液体クロマトグラフ質量分析計を用い、炭素数が4以上20以下の一般式(1)で示される化合物を測定した。抽出した液相について、MRM法を用いて各炭素数の一般式(1)で示される化合物のピーク面積を求めた。
XCm=((ACm-b)/a)×((50×m+45)/413)(3)
XCm:抽出溶液中の炭素数(m+1)の一般式(1)で示される化合物の含有量(ng/mL)
ACm:抽出溶液中の炭素数(m+1)の一般式(1)で示される化合物のピーク面積
この測定における定量限界は1ng/mLである。
粉末中に含まれる炭素数(m+1)の一般式(1)で示される化合物の含有量は式(4)により求めた。
YCm=XCm×12.6 (4)
YCm:粉末中に含まれる炭素数(m+1)の一般式(1)で示される化合物の含有量(対フルオロポリマー)
水性分散液中に含まれる炭素数(m+1)の一般式(1)で示される化合物の含有量は式(5)により求めた。
ZCm=XCm×86.3 (5)
ZCm:水性分散液中に含まれる炭素数(m+1)の一般式(1)で示される化合物の含有量(対フルオロポリマー)
粉末からの抽出
粉末1gにメタノール10g(12.6mL)を加え、60分間の超音波処理を行い、一般式(2)で示される化合物を含む上澄み液を抽出した。
水性分散液の固形分を測定し、PTFE固形分0.5gに相当する量の水性分散液を100mLスクリュー管に秤量した。その後、水性分散液中に含まれている水と合わせ、抽出溶媒が40g(43.14mL)の水/メタノール=50/50vol%となるように水とメタノールを加えた。その後、凝析するまでよく振とうした。固形分を取り除き、液相を4000rpmで1時間遠心分離を行い、一般式(2)で示される化合物を含む上澄み液を抽出した。
抽出液に含まれる一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量はパーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸に換算することにより求めた。
1ng/mL~100ng/mLの濃度既知のパーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸のメタノール標準溶液を5水準調製し、液体クロマトグラフ質量分析計(Waters, LC-MS ACQUITY UPLC/TQD)を用いて測定を行った。それぞれのサンプル濃度とピークの積分値から一次近似を用い、下記関係式(1)によりa、bを求めた。
A=a×X+b (1)
A:パーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸のピーク面積
X:パーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸の濃度(ng/mL)
液体クロマトグラフ質量分析計を用い、炭素数が4以上20以下の一般式(2)で示される化合物を測定した。抽出した液相について、MRM法を用いて各炭素数の一般式(2)で示される化合物のピーク面積を求めた。
XSn=((ASn-b)/a)×((50×n+81)/499)(3)
XSn:抽出溶液中の炭素数nの一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量(ng/mL)
ASn:抽出溶液中の炭素数nの一般式(2)で示される化合物のピーク面積
この測定における定量限界は1ng/mLである。
粉末中に含まれる炭素数nの一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量は式(4)により求めた。
YSn=XSn×12.6 (4)
YSn:粉末中に含まれる炭素数nの一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量(対フルオロポリマー)
水性分散液中に含まれる炭素数nの一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量は式(5)により求めた。
ZSn:水性分散液中に含まれる炭素数nの一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量(対フルオロポリマー)
リチウム(2.0g)、ジメチルフェニルクロロシラン(8.4g)、テトラヒドロフラン(120mL)混合物を室温下、6時間撹拌した。反応液に4-(tertブチルジメチルシロキシ)-1-モルホリノブタン-1-オン(10g)を加え、-78℃で2時間撹拌した。反応液に飽和塩化アンモニウム水溶液(300mL)を加え、酢酸エチルで抽出し、硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥し、減圧下に溶媒を留去した。残渣をシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーにより精製して、4-(tert-ブチルジメチルシロキシ)-1-(ジメチル(フェニル)シリル)ブタン-1-オン(6.4g)を得た。
1H-NMR(CDCl3) δppm:-0.01(s,6H)、0.49(s,6H)、0.85(s,9H)、1.61-1.71(m,2H)、2.66(J=7.0,t,2H)、3.51(J=6.2,t,2H)、7.38-7.40(m,3H),7.53-7.57(m,2H)
1H-NMR(CDCl3) δppm:0.02(s,6H)、0.88(s,12H)、1.22-1.31(m,4H)、1.51-1.59(m,2H)、1.72-1.83(m,2H)、2.43(J=7.6,t,2H)、2.55(J=7.6,t,2H)、2.67(s,4H)、3.59(J=5.9,t,2H)
1H-NMR(CDCl3) δppm:0.89(s,3H)、1.24-1.33(m,4H)、1.52-1.58(m,2H)、1.81-1.90(m,2H)、2.45(J=7.6,t,2H)、2.63(J=7.0,t,2H)、2.76(s,4H)、3.65(J=5.9,t,2H)
1H-NMR(D2O) δppm:0.67(J=6.8,t,3H)、1.04-1.14(m,4H)、1.31-1.42(m,2H)、1.72-1.79(m,2H)、2.36(J=7.3,t,2H)、2.54(J=7.3,t,2H)、2.62(s,4H)、3.86(J=6.2,t,2H)
内容積6.0Lのステンレス製オートクレーブに、イオン交換水3200g、Pluronic31R1(BASF社製)を0.1gを仕込み、系内を窒素ガスで充分置換したのち減圧にした。減圧状態でTFE/VdF混合モノマー60/40(モル%)を88g仕込み、攪拌下に80℃まで昇温した。ついで、純水に溶解した濃度27.1×10-3mol/Lの過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)水溶液をプランジャーポンプにて7.5g/minの流速で2分間供給して重合を開始した。その後、プランジャーポンプ流量は0.25g/minを維持した。重合圧力を0.90MPaとし、重合時の圧力低下を補うため、TFE/VdF混合モノマー60/40(モル%)を連続的に供給し、攪拌下に重合を行った。モノマー導入量が175gになった時点で、純水に溶解した濃度26.9mmol/Lの界面活性剤A溶液をプランジャーポンプにて0.58g/minの流速で供給を開始し、重合終了まで続けた。同時に、過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)水溶液の濃度を13.6×10-2mol/Lに変更し、プランジャーポンプにて7.5g/minの流速で重合終了まで供給を続けた。
内容積6.0Lのステンレス製オートクレーブに、イオン交換水3200g、Pluronic31R1(BASF社製)を0.1gを仕込み、系内を窒素ガスで充分置換したのち減圧にした。減圧状態でTFE/VdF混合モノマー60/40(モル%)を89g仕込み、攪拌下に80℃まで昇温した。ついで、純水に溶解した濃度27.1×10-3mol/Lの過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)水溶液をプランジャーポンプにて7.5g/minの流速で2分間供給して重合を開始した。その後、プランジャーポンプ流量は0.25g/minを維持した。重合圧力を0.90MPaとし、重合時の圧力低下を補うため、TFE/VdF混合モノマー60/40(モル%)を連続的に供給し、攪拌下に重合を行った。モノマー導入量が175gになった時点で、純水に溶解した濃度26.9mmol/Lのドデシル硫酸ナトリウム溶液をプランジャーポンプにて0.58g/minの流速で供給を開始し、重合終了まで続けた。同時に、過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)水溶液の濃度を13.6×10-2mol/Lに変更し、プランジャーポンプにて7.5g/minの流速で重合終了まで供給を続けた。
メタノール30mLに、実施例1で得られたフルオロポリマー分散液2mLを加え、超音波振動下で3時間抽出した。界面活性剤Aをメタノールに溶解させ、それぞれ0.1、1、10、100、1000ppmの標準溶液を作成し、HPLCによる検量線作成の後、抽出液中に含有される界面活性剤量を測定した所、水に対して、205.8ppmであり、フルオロポリマーに対して、1400ppmであった。
10-ウンデセン-1-オール(16g)、1,4-ベンゾキノン(10.2g)、DMF(160mL)、水(16mL)及びPdCl2(0.34g)の混合物を90℃で12時間加熱撹拌した。
その後減圧下に溶媒を留去した。得られた残渣を分液及びカラムクロマトグラフィーで精製し、11-ヒドロキシウンデカン-2-オン(15.4g)を得た。
得られた11-ヒドロキシウンデカン-2-オンのスペクトルデータを以下に示す。
1H-NMR(CDCl3) δppm:1.29-1.49(m,14H)、2.08(s,3H)、2.45(J=7.6,t,2H)、3.51(J=6.5,t,2H)
析出固体を減圧濾過し、酢酸エチルで洗浄し、10-オキソウンデシル硫酸ナトリウム(15.5g)(以下、界面活性剤Bという)を得た。得られた10-オキソウンデシル硫酸ナトリウムのスペクトルデータを以下に示す。
1H-NMR(CDCl3) δppm:1.08(J=6.8,m,10H)、1.32(m,2H)、1.45(m,2H)、1.98(s,3H)、2.33(J=7.6,t,2H)、3.83(J=6.5,t,2H)
ジビニルケトン(7.4g)、2-メチルフラン(8.0g)、酢酸(6mL)、水(60mL)を40℃で4時間撹拌した。反応溶液を飽和炭酸水素ナトリウム溶液に加え、酢酸エチルで抽出し、硫酸ナトリウムで乾燥し、減圧下に溶媒を留去した。残渣をシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーにより精製して、1-(5-メチル-2-フラニル)-3-ブテン-2-オン(7.4g)を得た。
1H-NMR(CDCl3) δppm:5.88(dd,J=17.4,10.6,2H)、6.32(dd,J=17.4,1.3,2H)、5.88(dd,J=10.6,1.3,2H)
内容積1Lのガラス製のオートクレーブに550gの脱イオン脱気水、30gのパラフィンワックス、0.0192gの界面活性剤Bを加え、反応器を密閉し、系内を窒素で置換を行ない、酸素を取り除いた。反応器を70℃に昇温し、TFEを反応器に充填して、反応器を0.78MPaにする。重合開始剤として過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)0.011gを仕込んだ。反応圧力が0.78MPa一定となるように、TFEを仕込む。TFEを50g仕込んだ時に、撹拌を停止し、反応器が大気圧になるまで脱圧を行なう。水性分散液を反応器より取り出し、冷却後、パラフィンワックスを分離し、得られたPTFE水性分散液に含まれる粒子の体積平均粒子径は、177nmであった。得られたPTFE水性分散液の固形分含有量は、8.2質量%であった。
得られたPTFE水性分散液を150℃、18時間乾燥した。
得られたPTFE樹脂のDSC測定を行なったところ、1回目の昇温時のピーク温度が344℃に観測された。また、この時の融解熱量は、75J/gであった。また、SSGは2.177であった。このことより、得られたPTFEは、高分子量PTFEであることが分かった。
メタノール30mL(23.8g)に、得られたPTFE水性分散液2mLを加え、超音波振動下で3時間抽出した。界面活性剤Bをメタノールに溶解させ、それぞれ0.1、1、10、100、1000ppmの標準溶液を作成し、HPLCによる検量線作成の後、抽出液中に含有される界面活性剤量を測定した所、PTFE水性分散液に対して、32ppmであった。
得られたPTFE水性分散液を凝固するまで激しく撹拌して凝析し、得られた凝集物を脱イオン水で洗浄した後、洗浄後の凝集物を150℃、18時間乾燥し、PTFE粉末を得た。
メタノール10mL(7.9g)に、得られたPTFE粉末1gを加え、超音波振動下で1時間抽出した。界面活性剤Bをメタノールに溶解させ、それぞれ0.1、1、10、100、1000ppmの標準溶液を作成し、HPLCによる検量線作成の後、抽出液中に含有される界面活性剤量を測定した所、PTFEに対して、15ppbであった。
内容積1Lのガラス製のオートクレーブに550gの脱イオン脱気水、30gのパラフィンワックス、0.0192gの界面活性剤Bを加え、反応器を密閉し、系内を窒素で置換を行ない、酸素を取り除いた。反応器を85℃に昇温し、TFEを反応器に充填して、反応器を0.78MPaにする。重合開始剤として過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)0.0022g、ジコハク酸パーオキサイド(DSP)0.110gを仕込んだ。反応圧力が0.78MPa一定となるように、TFEを仕込む。TFEを50g仕込んだ時に、撹拌を停止し、反応器が大気圧になるまで脱圧を行なう。水性分散液を反応器より取り出し、冷却後、パラフィンワックスを分離し、得られたPTFE水性分散液に含まれる粒子の体積平均粒子径は、189nmであった。また、得られたPTFE水性分散液の固形分含有量は、8.2質量%であった。
得られたPTFE水性分散液を150℃、18時間乾燥した。
得られたPTFE樹脂のDSC測定を行なったところ、1回目の昇温時のピーク温度が339℃と343℃に観測された。また、この時の融解熱量は、76J/gであった。また、SSGは2.173であった。このことより、得られたPTFEは、高分子量PTFEであることが分かった。
メタノール30mL(23.8g)に、得られたPTFE水性分散液2mLを加え、超音波振動下で3時間抽出した。界面活性剤Bをメタノールに溶解させ、それぞれ0.1、1、10、100、1000ppmの標準溶液を作成し、HPLCによる検量線作成の後、抽出液中に含有される界面活性剤量を測定した所、PTFE水性分散液に対して、31ppmであった。
内容積6LのSUS製のオートクレーブに3500gの脱イオン脱気水、100gのパラフィンワックス、0.122gの界面活性剤Bを加え、反応器を密閉し、系内を窒素で置換を行ない、酸素を取り除いた。反応器を70℃に昇温し、TFEを反応器に充填して、反応器を0.78MPaにする。重合開始剤として過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)0.070gを仕込んだ。反応圧が0.78MPa一定となるようにTFEを仕込む。反応途中に界面活性剤Bを9回、トータル1.10g添加した。TFEを425g仕込んだ時に、撹拌を停止し、反応器が大気圧になるまで脱圧を行なう。水性分散液を反応器より取り出し、冷却後、パラフィンワックスを分離し、得られたPTFE水性分散液に含まれる粒子の体積平均粒子径は、178nmであった。得られたPTFE水性分散液の固形分含有量は、10.7質量%であった。
得られたPTFE水性分散液を150℃、18時間乾燥した。
得られたPTFE樹脂のSSGは、2.175であった。このことより、得られたPTFEは、高分子量PTFEであることが分かった。
更に、得られたPTFE水性分散液に非イオン性界面活性剤としてポリオキシエチレントリデシエーテル(HLB=13.3)を加え、上記非イオン性界面活性剤濃度がPTFE100質量部に対して100質量部加えた。アンモニア水を用いてpH10に調整し、64℃の温度下に14時間静置して曇点濃縮を行なった。上澄み液を取り除き、濃縮液を得た。
得られた濃縮液に、非イオン性界面活性剤と水を加え、固形分含有量60.0質量%、非イオン性界面活性剤濃度(N)を6.5質量%となるように調整した。
得られたPTFE濃縮液の25℃の粘度は、46mPa・sであった。
更に、得られたPTFE水性分散液に非イオン性界面活性剤としてポリオキシエチレントリデシエーテル(HLB=13.3)を加え、上記非イオン性界面活性剤濃度がPTFE固形分100質量部に対して100質量部加えた。アンモニア水を用いてpH10に調整し、64℃の温度下に14時間静置して曇点濃縮を行なった。上澄み液を取り除き、PTFE濃縮液Aを得た。
得られたPTFE濃縮液Aに、上記非イオン性界面活性剤と水を加え、固形分含有量60.0質量%、非イオン性界面活性剤濃度(N)を6.5質量%となるように調整し、PTFE濃縮液Bを得た。
得られたPTFE濃縮液Bの25℃の粘度は、46mPa・sであった。
実施例5で得られた濃縮液Aに、上記非イオン性界面活性剤、水、及び粘度調整剤としてラウリル硫酸アンモニウム(PTFE固形分に対して1000ppm)を加え、固形分含有量60.0質量%、非イオン性界面活性剤濃度(N)を6.5質量%となるように調整し、PTFE濃縮液Cを得た。得られたPTFE濃縮液Cの25℃の粘度は、25mPa・s、35℃の粘度は、25mPa・sであった。
実施例5で得られたPTFE水性分散液に脱イオン水を加え、比重(25℃)を1.080に調整した。撹拌翼と邪魔板を備えた凝析槽に、比重調整したPTFE水性分散液を加え、内温が34℃になるように温度調節した。調節後直ちに硝酸を添加すると同時に撹拌を開始した。撹拌開始後、水性分散液がスラリー状態を経て、湿潤PTFE粉末が形成されたことを確認し、更に撹拌を継続した。
続いて、湿潤PTFE粉末を濾別し、湿潤PTFE粉末と脱イオン水2.5Lを凝析槽内に仕込み、ポリマー粉末を洗浄した。洗浄の後、湿潤PTFE粉末を濾別し、150℃の熱風循環式乾燥機内に18時間静置して乾燥させ、PTFE粉末を得た。
内容積6LのSUS製のオートクレーブに3600gの脱イオン脱気水、180gのパラフィンワックス、0.540gの界面活性剤Bを加え、反応器を密閉し、系内を窒素で置換を行ない、酸素を取り除いた。反応器を70℃に昇温し、TFEを反応器に充填して、反応器を2.76MPaにする。重合開始剤として過硫酸アンモニウム(APS)0.620g、ジコハク酸パーオキサイド(DSP)1.488gを仕込んだ。反応圧が2.76MPa一定となるようにTFEを仕込む。TFEを330g仕込んだ時に、撹拌を停止し、反応器が大気圧になるまで脱圧を行なう。水性分散液を反応器より取り出し、冷却後、パラフィンワックスを分離し、得られたPTFE水性分散液に含まれる粒子の体積平均粒子径は、136nmであった。得られたPTFE水性分散液の固形分含有量は、8.4質量%であった。
得られたPTFE水性分散液を凝固するまで激しく撹拌して凝析し、得られた凝集物を150℃、18時間乾燥し、PTFE粉末を得た。
得られたPTFE粉末のDSC測定を行なったところ、1回目の昇温時のピーク温度が336℃に観測された。
得られたPTFE粉末のSSGは2.211であった。
内容積6LのSUS製のオートクレーブに3600gの脱イオン脱気水、180gのパラフィンワックス、0.540gの界面活性剤Bを加え、反応器を密閉し、系内を窒素で置換を行ない、酸素を取り除いた。反応器を70℃に昇温し、TFEを反応器に充填して、反応器を2.76MPaにする。重合開始剤としてシュウ酸を0.50gを添加した後、過マンガン酸カリウム水溶液の連続的な添加を開始した。反応圧が2.76MPa一定となるようにTFEを仕込んだ。過マンガン酸カリウム固形分で0.23g相当になるまで過マンガン酸水溶液を連続的に仕込んだ。TFEを330g仕込んだ時に、撹拌を停止し、反応器が大気圧になるまで脱圧を行なう。水性分散液を反応器より取り出し、冷却後、パラフィンワックスを分離し、得られたPTFE水性分散液に含まれる粒子の体積平均粒子径は、114nmであった。得られたPTFE水性分散液の固形分含有量は、8.4質量%であった。
得られたPTFE水性分散液を凝固するまで激しく撹拌して凝析し、得られた凝集物を150℃、18時間乾燥し、PTFE粉末を得た。
得られたPTFE粉末のDSC測定を行なったところ、1回目の昇温時のピーク温度が335℃に観測された。
得られたPTFE粉末のSSGは2.233であった。
実施例5で得られたPTFE水性分散液の固形分を測定し、PTFE固形分2.5gに相当する量の水性分散液を100mLスクリュー管に秤量した。その後、水性分散液中に含まれている水と合わせ、抽出溶媒が40g(43.14mL)の水/メタノール=50/50vol%となるように水とメタノールを加えた。その後、凝析するまでよく振とうした。固形分を取り除き、液相を4000rpmで1時間遠心分離を行い、一般式(2)で示される化合物を含む上澄み液Bを抽出した。
上澄み液Bを上記に示す一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量測定方法を用いて、測定した。結果を下記表11に示す。なお、定量限界は、17.2ppbである。
実施例8で得られたPTFE粉末10gにメタノール10g(12.6mL)を加え、60分間の超音波処理を行い、一般式(2)で示される化合物を含む上澄み液Cを抽出した。
上澄み液Cを上記に示す一般式(2)で示される化合物の含有量測定方法を用いて、測定した。結果を下記表11に示す。なお、定量限界は、1.3ppbである。
Claims (20)
- 界面活性剤の存在下に、水性媒体中でフルオロモノマーの重合を行うことによりフルオロポリマーを得る工程を含むフルオロポリマーの製造方法であって、前記界面活性剤が、下記式(a):
からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種であることを特徴とするフルオロポリマーの製造方法。 - 前記式(a)中、R2a及びR3aは、独立に、単結合又は炭素数1以上の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキレン基又は炭素数3以上の環状のアルキレン基であり、炭素原子に結合した水素原子がヒドロキシ基又はエステル結合を含む1価の有機基により置換されていてもよい請求項1記載の製造方法。
- 前記式(a)中、R1aは、カルボニル基を含まない炭素数1~8の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、カルボニル基を含まない炭素数3~8の環状のアルキル基、1~10個のカルボニル基を含む炭素数2~45の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、カルボニル基を含む炭素数3~45の環状のアルキル基、又は、炭素数が3~45の1価又は2価の複素環を含むアルキル基である請求項1又は2記載の製造方法。
- 前記式(a)中、R2a及びR3aは、独立に、カルボニル基を含まない炭素数1以上のアルキレン基である請求項1、2、3又は4記載の製造方法。
- 前記式(a)中、R2a及びR3aは、独立に、カルボニル基を含まない炭素数1~3のアルキレン基である請求項1、2、3、4又は5記載の製造方法。
- 前記式(b)中、Xbは金属原子又はNR5b 4(R5bは前記のとおり)である請求項1、2、3、4、5又は6記載の製造方法。
- 前記界面活性剤が、1H-NMRスペクトルにおいて、ケミカルシフト2.0~5.0ppmの領域に観測される全ピーク強度の積分値が10%以上である請求項1、2、3、4、5、6又は7記載の製造方法。
- 下記式(a):
- 水性媒体中でフルオロモノマーを重合することによりフルオロポリマーを製造するための界面活性剤の使用であって、前記界面活性剤が、下記式(a):
- フルオロポリマー、及び、下記式(a):
- フルオロポリマーを含み、
下記一般式(3)で示される化合物を、フルオロポリマーに対して、500ppb以上含むことを特徴とする組成物。
一般式(3):(H-(CF2)8-SO3)qM2
(式中、M2はH、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。qは1又は2である。) - 一般式(3)で示される化合物の含有量が、フルオロポリマーに対して、500~20000ppbである請求項12記載の組成物。
- 一般式(3)で示される化合物の含有量が、フルオロポリマーに対して、1000ppb超である請求項12又は13記載の組成物。
- 一般式(3)で示される化合物の含有量が、フルオロポリマーに対して、1000ppb超、20000ppb以下である請求項12~14のいずれかに記載の組成物。
- 下記一般式(4)で示される化合物を、フルオロポリマーに対して500ppb以上含む請求項12~15のいずれかに記載の組成物。
一般式(4):(H-(CF2)7-COO)pM1
(式中、M1は、H、金属原子、NR5 4、置換基を有していてもよいイミダゾリウム、置換基を有していてもよいピリジニウム、又は、置換基を有していてもよいホスホニウムであり、R5はH又は有機基であり、同一でも異なっていてもよい。pは1又は2である。) - 焼成後の色調L*が50(フッ素未処理)以下である請求項12~16のいずれかに記載の組成物。
- フッ素化処理前後の色調変化率ΔL*が70%以上である請求項12~16のいずれかに記載の組成物。
- 請求項12~18のいずれかに記載の組成物からなる成形体。
- 延伸体である請求項19記載の成形体。
Priority Applications (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201880020239.1A CN110461883B (zh) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-30 | 含氟聚合物的制造方法、聚合用表面活性剂和表面活性剂的使用 |
US16/498,849 US11279814B2 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-30 | Production method for fluoropolymer, surfactant for polymerization, and use of surfactant |
JP2019510245A JP6750729B2 (ja) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-30 | フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤及び界面活性剤の使用 |
EP18776956.7A EP3604350A4 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-30 | MANUFACTURING PROCESS FOR FLUOROPOLYMER, SURFACTANT FOR POLYMERIZATION AND USE OF SURFACTANT |
EP21159543.4A EP3858871A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-30 | Composition comprising a fluoropolymer |
US17/672,013 US20220169830A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2022-02-15 | Production method for fluoropolymer, surfactant for polymerization, and use of surfactant |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2017-073083 | 2017-03-31 | ||
JP2017073083 | 2017-03-31 | ||
JP2018020461 | 2018-02-07 | ||
JP2018-020461 | 2018-02-07 |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/498,849 A-371-Of-International US11279814B2 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-30 | Production method for fluoropolymer, surfactant for polymerization, and use of surfactant |
US17/672,013 Division US20220169830A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2022-02-15 | Production method for fluoropolymer, surfactant for polymerization, and use of surfactant |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2018181898A1 true WO2018181898A1 (ja) | 2018-10-04 |
Family
ID=63676196
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2018/013605 WO2018181898A1 (ja) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-30 | フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤及び界面活性剤の使用 |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US11279814B2 (ja) |
EP (2) | EP3858871A1 (ja) |
JP (2) | JP6750729B2 (ja) |
CN (2) | CN113667247A (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2018181898A1 (ja) |
Cited By (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2020158940A1 (ja) * | 2019-02-01 | 2020-08-06 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | ポリテトラフルオロエチレンの製造方法 |
WO2020218618A1 (ja) * | 2019-04-26 | 2020-10-29 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法 |
US20200399211A1 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2020-12-24 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Alkyl sulfate ester or salt of same |
WO2021066189A1 (ja) | 2019-10-03 | 2021-04-08 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | ポリテトラフルオロエチレンおよびその製造方法 |
EP3828208A4 (en) * | 2018-07-23 | 2022-07-13 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE AND STRETCHED BODY |
WO2022163814A1 (ja) * | 2021-01-28 | 2022-08-04 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー組成物の製造方法 |
WO2022181839A1 (ja) * | 2021-02-26 | 2022-09-01 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
WO2022181838A1 (ja) * | 2021-02-26 | 2022-09-01 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
WO2022196804A1 (ja) | 2021-03-18 | 2022-09-22 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フッ素樹脂の製造方法、フッ素樹脂および水性分散液 |
US11518826B2 (en) * | 2017-12-25 | 2022-12-06 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Method for producing polytetrafluoroethylene powder |
EP4006063A4 (en) * | 2019-07-23 | 2023-10-25 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | METHOD FOR PRODUCING A FLUROPOLYMER, POLYTETRAFLUORETHYLENE COMPOSITION AND POLYTETRAFLUORETHYLENE POWDER |
Families Citing this family (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP3684861B1 (en) * | 2017-11-30 | 2023-12-27 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | 3d-printed articles |
EP4083085A4 (en) * | 2019-12-27 | 2024-01-24 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | METHOD FOR PRODUCING A FLUORINE-CONTAINING POLYMER, FLUORINE-CONTAINING ELASTOMER AND AQUEOUS DISPERSION LIQUID |
CN113527565A (zh) * | 2021-06-30 | 2021-10-22 | 泰兴梅兰新材料有限公司 | 一种纤维级ptfe纺丝乳液的制备方法 |
WO2024024891A1 (ja) * | 2022-07-27 | 2024-02-01 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法、フルオロポリマー水性分散液および塗料組成物 |
WO2024024917A1 (ja) * | 2022-07-27 | 2024-02-01 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法、フルオロポリマー水性分散液および塗料組成物 |
Citations (28)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS4929294A (ja) * | 1972-07-14 | 1974-03-15 | ||
JPS6149327B2 (ja) | 1977-09-30 | 1986-10-29 | Daikin Kogyo Co Ltd | |
JPS6157324B2 (ja) | 1981-10-22 | 1986-12-06 | Daikin Kogyo Co Ltd | |
JPH0481608B2 (ja) | 1983-06-23 | 1992-12-24 | Ii Ai Deyuhon De Nimoasu Ando Co | |
JPH0513961B2 (ja) | 1985-03-28 | 1993-02-23 | Daikin Ind Ltd | |
JP2538783B2 (ja) | 1987-09-24 | 1996-10-02 | 村樫石灰工業 株式会社 | 防塵処理剤組成物 |
WO1997024381A1 (fr) | 1995-12-28 | 1997-07-10 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Copolymeres elastiques contenant du fluor, composition durcissable les contenant et materiau d'etancheite prepare a l'aide de ces copolymeres |
JPH10147617A (ja) | 1996-09-18 | 1998-06-02 | Daikin Ind Ltd | ポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末及びその製造方法 |
US5804654A (en) | 1995-04-28 | 1998-09-08 | General Electric Company | Tetrafluoroethylene-containing powder, process for making same, articles molded therefrom and compositions containing such powder |
JP2827152B2 (ja) | 1994-07-11 | 1998-11-18 | 村樫石灰工業株式会社 | 塵埃抑制方法 |
JPH1129679A (ja) | 1996-07-31 | 1999-02-02 | Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd | ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有混合粉体、その製造方法、それを含む熱可塑性樹脂組成物およびその成形体 |
JPH1149912A (ja) | 1997-04-17 | 1999-02-23 | General Electric Co <Ge> | 水性フルオロポリマー分散物およびフルオロポリマー含有熱可塑性樹脂組成物の製造方法 |
WO2000001741A1 (fr) | 1998-07-07 | 2000-01-13 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Procede de production de fluoropolymere |
JP2003002980A (ja) | 2001-06-20 | 2003-01-08 | Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd | ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有粉体の製造方法 |
JP2005527652A (ja) | 2002-01-04 | 2005-09-15 | イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー | 濃縮フルオロポリマー分散液 |
WO2006054612A1 (ja) | 2004-11-16 | 2006-05-26 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー及び変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン成形体 |
WO2007000812A1 (ja) | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-04 | Nippo Corporation | 塵埃抑制処理方法 |
WO2007004250A1 (ja) | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-11 | Du Pont-Mitsui Fluorochemicals Co., Ltd. | 塵埃処理剤組成物 |
US20070015937A1 (en) | 2005-07-15 | 2007-01-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Process for recovery of fluorinated carboxylic acid surfactants from exhaust gas |
JP2009513795A (ja) * | 2005-10-28 | 2009-04-02 | デュポン パフォーマンス エラストマーズ エルエルシー | 臭素またはヨウ素原子硬化部位を有するフルオロエラストマーの製造方法 |
JP2010511096A (ja) | 2006-11-29 | 2010-04-08 | デュポン パフォーマンス エラストマーズ エルエルシー | フルオロエラストマーの半回分式製造方法 |
US7897682B2 (en) | 2006-11-09 | 2011-03-01 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Aqueous polymerization of fluorinated monomers using polymerization agent comprising fluoropolyether acid or salt and hydrocarbon surfactant |
US7977438B2 (en) | 2006-11-09 | 2011-07-12 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Aqueous polymerization of fluorinated monomers using polymerization agent comprising fluoropolyether acid or salt and siloxane surfactant |
JP2011520020A (ja) | 2008-05-09 | 2011-07-14 | イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー | フルオロポリマー樹脂の製造に使用するフルオロエーテルカルボン酸またはその塩の削減 |
WO2012002038A1 (ja) | 2010-06-30 | 2012-01-05 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素重合体のオルガノゾル組成物 |
WO2013146950A1 (ja) | 2012-03-30 | 2013-10-03 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 非イオン性界面活性剤組成物、及び、フルオロポリマー水性分散液 |
WO2013146947A1 (ja) | 2012-03-27 | 2013-10-03 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー水性分散液 |
WO2018062448A1 (ja) * | 2016-09-30 | 2018-04-05 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 硫酸エステル又はその塩、及び、界面活性剤 |
Family Cites Families (28)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
FR2046949B1 (ja) | 1969-06-20 | 1973-01-12 | Colgate Palmolive Co | |
CS190937B1 (en) * | 1977-05-12 | 1979-06-29 | Vaclav Votapek | Detergent and process for preparing thereof |
AU7957494A (en) | 1993-09-20 | 1995-04-10 | Waters Corporation | Chiral surfactants and methods for their use in chiral separations |
JPH07264461A (ja) | 1994-03-18 | 1995-10-13 | Fuji Photo Optical Co Ltd | テレビカメラ用レンズの状態診断装置 |
PH11997056158B1 (en) | 1996-04-16 | 2001-10-15 | Procter & Gamble | Mid-chain branched primary alkyl sulphates as surfactants |
JPH10338617A (ja) | 1997-06-06 | 1998-12-22 | Kanebo Ltd | 陰イオン界面活性剤及びそれを含有する化粧料 |
JPH1129788A (ja) | 1997-07-09 | 1999-02-02 | Nof Corp | 洗浄剤組成物 |
JP2000001467A (ja) | 1998-06-11 | 2000-01-07 | Lion Corp | (ポリ)グリセリルエーテル硫酸塩及びその製造方法 |
DE19857111A1 (de) * | 1998-12-11 | 2000-06-15 | Dyneon Gmbh | Wäßrige Dispersionen von Fluorpolymeren |
AU2002227945A1 (en) | 2000-12-04 | 2002-06-18 | Ciba Specialty Chemicals Holding Inc. | Onium salts and the use therof as latent acids |
JP4042724B2 (ja) * | 2003-07-03 | 2008-02-06 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー凝集体及びその製造方法 |
US7811473B2 (en) | 2004-05-20 | 2010-10-12 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Branched surfactant having fluoroalkyl group and hydrocarbon group |
JP4497297B2 (ja) | 2004-06-21 | 2010-07-07 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロアルキル基と炭化水素基を有する分岐型界面活性剤 |
EP1894970B1 (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2010-11-17 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Aqueous fluoropolymer dispersion and process for producing the same |
WO2009091813A1 (en) | 2008-01-14 | 2009-07-23 | Wyeth | Compounds useful as alpha7 nicotinic acetylcholine receptor agonists |
US20100036074A1 (en) * | 2008-08-08 | 2010-02-11 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Melt-Flowable Fluoropolymer Comprising Repeating Units Arising from Tetrafluoroethylene and a Hydrocarbon Monomer Having a Functional Group and a Polymerizable Carbon-Carbon Double Bond |
EP2513173B1 (en) * | 2009-12-18 | 2013-09-25 | Solvay Specialty Polymers Italy S.p.A. | Process for manufacturing a dispersion of a vinylidene fluoride polymer |
JP5742384B2 (ja) * | 2010-09-30 | 2015-07-01 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素重合体の製造方法 |
EP3539995B1 (en) * | 2010-11-09 | 2020-12-30 | The Chemours Company FC, LLC | Fluoropolymer disperson obtained with an aqueous polymerisation of fluoromonomer using hydrocarbon surfactant |
EP2703557B1 (en) | 2011-04-25 | 2016-12-21 | Teijin Frontier Co., Ltd. | Fabric and textile product |
EP2736933B1 (en) | 2011-07-28 | 2019-07-17 | Arkema, Inc. | Method of producing fluoropolymers using alkyl sulfate surfactants |
CN102382323A (zh) | 2011-08-11 | 2012-03-21 | 南京工业大学 | 一种提高聚偏氟乙烯耐碱腐蚀性的方法 |
EP3023441B1 (en) * | 2013-07-18 | 2019-03-06 | AGC Inc. | Method for producing aqueous dispersion of fluorine-containing polymer, aqueous dispersion of fluorine-containing polymer, and fluorine-containing polymer |
GB2517481A (en) * | 2013-08-22 | 2015-02-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Co | Method of making peroxide fluoropolymers using non-fluorindated emulsifiers |
CN105367692B (zh) * | 2015-12-07 | 2017-11-24 | 上海三爱富新材料股份有限公司 | 低分子量聚四氟乙烯树脂的制备方法 |
EP3514138B1 (en) | 2016-09-30 | 2023-08-23 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Carboxylate salt or sulfonate salt, and surfactant |
JP6888669B2 (ja) | 2017-03-31 | 2021-06-16 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | アルキル硫酸エステル又はその塩 |
SG11202000862YA (en) | 2017-08-10 | 2020-02-27 | Daikin Ind Ltd | Method for producing purified polytetrafluoroethylene aqueous dispersion liquid, method for producing modified polytetrafluoroethylene powder, method for producing polytetrafluoroethylene molded body, and composition |
-
2018
- 2018-03-30 EP EP21159543.4A patent/EP3858871A1/en active Pending
- 2018-03-30 WO PCT/JP2018/013605 patent/WO2018181898A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2018-03-30 CN CN202110947411.1A patent/CN113667247A/zh active Pending
- 2018-03-30 CN CN201880020239.1A patent/CN110461883B/zh active Active
- 2018-03-30 EP EP18776956.7A patent/EP3604350A4/en active Pending
- 2018-03-30 JP JP2019510245A patent/JP6750729B2/ja active Active
- 2018-03-30 US US16/498,849 patent/US11279814B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-08-12 JP JP2020136389A patent/JP2020200471A/ja active Pending
-
2022
- 2022-02-15 US US17/672,013 patent/US20220169830A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (30)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS4929294A (ja) * | 1972-07-14 | 1974-03-15 | ||
JPS6149327B2 (ja) | 1977-09-30 | 1986-10-29 | Daikin Kogyo Co Ltd | |
JPS6157324B2 (ja) | 1981-10-22 | 1986-12-06 | Daikin Kogyo Co Ltd | |
JPH0481608B2 (ja) | 1983-06-23 | 1992-12-24 | Ii Ai Deyuhon De Nimoasu Ando Co | |
JPH0513961B2 (ja) | 1985-03-28 | 1993-02-23 | Daikin Ind Ltd | |
JP2538783B2 (ja) | 1987-09-24 | 1996-10-02 | 村樫石灰工業 株式会社 | 防塵処理剤組成物 |
JP2827152B2 (ja) | 1994-07-11 | 1998-11-18 | 村樫石灰工業株式会社 | 塵埃抑制方法 |
US5804654A (en) | 1995-04-28 | 1998-09-08 | General Electric Company | Tetrafluoroethylene-containing powder, process for making same, articles molded therefrom and compositions containing such powder |
WO1997024381A1 (fr) | 1995-12-28 | 1997-07-10 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Copolymeres elastiques contenant du fluor, composition durcissable les contenant et materiau d'etancheite prepare a l'aide de ces copolymeres |
JPH1129679A (ja) | 1996-07-31 | 1999-02-02 | Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd | ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有混合粉体、その製造方法、それを含む熱可塑性樹脂組成物およびその成形体 |
JPH10147617A (ja) | 1996-09-18 | 1998-06-02 | Daikin Ind Ltd | ポリテトラフルオロエチレン粉末及びその製造方法 |
JPH1149912A (ja) | 1997-04-17 | 1999-02-23 | General Electric Co <Ge> | 水性フルオロポリマー分散物およびフルオロポリマー含有熱可塑性樹脂組成物の製造方法 |
WO2000001741A1 (fr) | 1998-07-07 | 2000-01-13 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Procede de production de fluoropolymere |
JP2003002980A (ja) | 2001-06-20 | 2003-01-08 | Mitsubishi Rayon Co Ltd | ポリテトラフルオロエチレン含有粉体の製造方法 |
JP2005527652A (ja) | 2002-01-04 | 2005-09-15 | イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー | 濃縮フルオロポリマー分散液 |
WO2006054612A1 (ja) | 2004-11-16 | 2006-05-26 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | 変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレンファインパウダー及び変性ポリテトラフルオロエチレン成形体 |
WO2007000812A1 (ja) | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-04 | Nippo Corporation | 塵埃抑制処理方法 |
WO2007004250A1 (ja) | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-11 | Du Pont-Mitsui Fluorochemicals Co., Ltd. | 塵埃処理剤組成物 |
US20070015937A1 (en) | 2005-07-15 | 2007-01-18 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Process for recovery of fluorinated carboxylic acid surfactants from exhaust gas |
US20070027251A1 (en) | 2005-07-15 | 2007-02-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Method of removing fluorinated carboxylic acid from aqueous liquid |
US20070025902A1 (en) | 2005-07-15 | 2007-02-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Recovery of fluorinated carboxylic acid from adsorbent particles |
JP2009513795A (ja) * | 2005-10-28 | 2009-04-02 | デュポン パフォーマンス エラストマーズ エルエルシー | 臭素またはヨウ素原子硬化部位を有するフルオロエラストマーの製造方法 |
US7897682B2 (en) | 2006-11-09 | 2011-03-01 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Aqueous polymerization of fluorinated monomers using polymerization agent comprising fluoropolyether acid or salt and hydrocarbon surfactant |
US7977438B2 (en) | 2006-11-09 | 2011-07-12 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Aqueous polymerization of fluorinated monomers using polymerization agent comprising fluoropolyether acid or salt and siloxane surfactant |
JP2010511096A (ja) | 2006-11-29 | 2010-04-08 | デュポン パフォーマンス エラストマーズ エルエルシー | フルオロエラストマーの半回分式製造方法 |
JP2011520020A (ja) | 2008-05-09 | 2011-07-14 | イー・アイ・デュポン・ドウ・ヌムール・アンド・カンパニー | フルオロポリマー樹脂の製造に使用するフルオロエーテルカルボン酸またはその塩の削減 |
WO2012002038A1 (ja) | 2010-06-30 | 2012-01-05 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素重合体のオルガノゾル組成物 |
WO2013146947A1 (ja) | 2012-03-27 | 2013-10-03 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー水性分散液 |
WO2013146950A1 (ja) | 2012-03-30 | 2013-10-03 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 非イオン性界面活性剤組成物、及び、フルオロポリマー水性分散液 |
WO2018062448A1 (ja) * | 2016-09-30 | 2018-04-05 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 硫酸エステル又はその塩、及び、界面活性剤 |
Non-Patent Citations (3)
Title |
---|
KASAI, J. APPL. POLYMER SCI., vol. 57, 1995, pages 797 |
SCHULZ, R. GREGORY ET AL.: "Micelles formed from photochemically active amphiphiles: structural characterization by small-angle neutron scattering", JOURNAL OF MOLECULAR STRUCTURE, vol. 383, no. 1, 1996, pages 191 - 196, XP055558886 * |
See also references of EP3604350A4 |
Cited By (21)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11999681B2 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2024-06-04 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Alkyl sulfate ester or salt of same |
US20200399211A1 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2020-12-24 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Alkyl sulfate ester or salt of same |
US11518826B2 (en) * | 2017-12-25 | 2022-12-06 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | Method for producing polytetrafluoroethylene powder |
EP3828208A4 (en) * | 2018-07-23 | 2022-07-13 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE AND STRETCHED BODY |
CN113366034B (zh) * | 2019-02-01 | 2022-11-11 | 大金工业株式会社 | 聚四氟乙烯的制造方法 |
WO2020158940A1 (ja) * | 2019-02-01 | 2020-08-06 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | ポリテトラフルオロエチレンの製造方法 |
JP7060826B2 (ja) | 2019-02-01 | 2022-04-27 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | ポリテトラフルオロエチレンの製造方法 |
CN113366034A (zh) * | 2019-02-01 | 2021-09-07 | 大金工业株式会社 | 聚四氟乙烯的制造方法 |
JPWO2020158940A1 (ja) * | 2019-02-01 | 2021-10-28 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | ポリテトラフルオロエチレンの製造方法 |
CN113710709A (zh) * | 2019-04-26 | 2021-11-26 | 大金工业株式会社 | 含氟聚合物水性分散液的制造方法 |
WO2020218618A1 (ja) * | 2019-04-26 | 2020-10-29 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法 |
EP4006063A4 (en) * | 2019-07-23 | 2023-10-25 | Daikin Industries, Ltd. | METHOD FOR PRODUCING A FLUROPOLYMER, POLYTETRAFLUORETHYLENE COMPOSITION AND POLYTETRAFLUORETHYLENE POWDER |
WO2021066189A1 (ja) | 2019-10-03 | 2021-04-08 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | ポリテトラフルオロエチレンおよびその製造方法 |
WO2022163814A1 (ja) * | 2021-01-28 | 2022-08-04 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フルオロポリマー組成物の製造方法 |
JP2022132223A (ja) * | 2021-02-26 | 2022-09-07 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
JP2022132222A (ja) * | 2021-02-26 | 2022-09-07 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
JP7277843B2 (ja) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-05-19 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
JP7277842B2 (ja) | 2021-02-26 | 2023-05-19 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
WO2022181838A1 (ja) * | 2021-02-26 | 2022-09-01 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
WO2022181839A1 (ja) * | 2021-02-26 | 2022-09-01 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | 含フッ素共重合体 |
WO2022196804A1 (ja) | 2021-03-18 | 2022-09-22 | ダイキン工業株式会社 | フッ素樹脂の製造方法、フッ素樹脂および水性分散液 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20220169830A1 (en) | 2022-06-02 |
CN113667247A (zh) | 2021-11-19 |
CN110461883A (zh) | 2019-11-15 |
JPWO2018181898A1 (ja) | 2019-11-07 |
EP3604350A4 (en) | 2021-06-09 |
US20210115224A1 (en) | 2021-04-22 |
EP3604350A1 (en) | 2020-02-05 |
CN110461883B (zh) | 2021-11-30 |
EP3858871A1 (en) | 2021-08-04 |
US11279814B2 (en) | 2022-03-22 |
JP6750729B2 (ja) | 2020-09-02 |
JP2020200471A (ja) | 2020-12-17 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6750729B2 (ja) | フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤及び界面活性剤の使用 | |
JP7112000B2 (ja) | フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤及び界面活性剤の使用 | |
WO2019168183A1 (ja) | フルオロポリマーの製造方法 | |
JP7492153B2 (ja) | フルオロポリマーの製造方法 | |
JP6939916B2 (ja) | フルオロポリマーの製造方法、重合用界面活性剤、界面活性剤の使用及び組成物 | |
WO2022191286A1 (ja) | フルオロポリマー水性分散液の製造方法 | |
CN113710709A (zh) | 含氟聚合物水性分散液的制造方法 | |
WO2023210819A1 (ja) | フルオロポリマーの製造方法 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 18776956 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2019510245 Country of ref document: JP |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2018776956 Country of ref document: EP |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2018776956 Country of ref document: EP Effective date: 20191031 |